DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
En
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
The Table of Contents..............................................................
The Q&A Index .........................................................................
The Quick Start Guide .............................................................
0
0
0
i
i
i
0
i
i
i
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
s
x
y
d
N
k
S
Z
r
J
l
t
I
e
Q
U
n
0111
0117
0123
0153
0173
0191
0207
0235
0255
0263
0283
0385
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”
index.
0
Taking Photographs
Shooting and Framing Options
i
Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots?
Can I frame photos in the monitor (C live view
photography)?
Can I shoot movies (1 movie live view)?
Can I join photographs taken at regular intervals to
create a time-lapse movie?
Release Modes
i
Can I take photos in quick succession?
How do I take pictures with the self-timer?
Focus
i
Can I choose how the camera focuses?
Can I choose the focus point?
Exposure
i
Can I make photos brighter or darker?
184,
How do I preserve details in shadows and highlights?
Image Quality and Size
i
How do I take pictures for printing at large sizes?
How can I get more pictures on the memory card?
0
Viewing Photographs
Playback
i
How do I view photographs on the camera?
How do I view more information about a photo?
Can I view photos in an automatic slide show?
Can I view photos on a TV?
Can I protect photos from accidental deletion?
Deletion
i
How do I delete unwanted photos?
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
Retouching Photographs
How do I create retouched copies of photos?
How do I make JPEG copies of RAW (NEF) photos?
Can I trim movie footage on the camera or save
movie stills?
0
Menus and Settings
How do I use the menus?
How do I keep the displays from turning off?
How do I focus the viewfinder?
How do I set the camera clock?
How do I format memory cards?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I get help for a menu or message?
0
Connections
How do I copy photos to a computer?
How do I print photos?
Can I print the date of recording on my photos?
0
Maintenance and Optional Accessories
What memory cards can I use?
What lenses can I use?
What optional flash units (Speedlights) can I use?
What other accessories are available for my camera?
What software is available for my camera?
How do I clean the camera?
Where should I take my camera for servicing and
repairs?
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Package Contents...................................................................................1
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................28
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indices................................................................................................. 67
Viewing Movies.................................................................................... 77
Editing Movies...................................................................................... 79
Image Size.............................................................................................. 93
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Focus......................................................................................108
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................116
h: Manual......................................................................................... 129
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................231
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a: Autofocus ....................................................................................307
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g: Movie............................................................................................340
Resize............................................................................................374
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage............................................................................................. 398
Specifications......................................................................................430
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
warnings before using this Nikon product.
A
❚❚WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikon-
authorized service center for
inspection.
A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment
control
A Do not disassemble
When operating the viewfinder
diopter adjustment control with
your eye to the viewfinder, care
should be taken not to put your
finger in your eye accidentally.
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury. In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable
gas
cause an explosion. Dispose of
used batteries as directed.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury. In addition,
note that small parts constitute a
chocking hazard. Should a child
swallow any part of this
equipment, consult a physician
immediately.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.
• Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged. To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
A Do not remain in contact with the
camera, battery, or charger for extended
periods while the devices are on or in use
Parts of the device become hot.
Leaving the device in direct
contact with the skin for extended
periods may result in low-
temperature burns.
A Observe proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
• Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
• Use only CR1616 lithium batteries
to replace the clock battery. Using
another type of battery could
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Observe proper precautions when
handling the charger
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in fire or
electric shock.
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
the plug should be removed with
a dry cloth. Continued use could
result in fire.
• Do not handle the power cable or
go near the charger during
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
this precaution could result in
electric shock.
A Use appropriate cables
When connecting cables to the
input and output jacks, use only
the cables provided or sold by
Nikon for the purpose to maintain
compliance with product
regulations.
A CD-ROMs
CD-ROMs containing software or
manuals should not be played
back on audio CD equipment.
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
player could cause hearing loss or
damage the equipment.
• Do not damage, modify, or
forcibly tug or bend the power
cable. Do not place it under
heavy objects or expose it to heat
or flame. Should the insulation be
damaged and the wires become
exposed, take the power cable to
a Nikon-authorized service
representative for inspection.
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in fire or electric
shock.
• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to
observe this precaution could
result in electric shock.
• Do not use with travel converters
or adapters designed to convert
from one voltage to another or
with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure
to observe this precaution could
damage the product or cause
overheating or fire.
A Do not aim a flash at the operator of a
motor vehicle
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in accidents.
A Observe caution when using the flash
• Using optional flash units in close
contact with the skin or other
objects could cause burns.
• Using optional flash units close to
the subject’s eyes could cause
temporary visual impairment.
Particular care should be
observed when photographing
infants, when the flash should be
no less than one meter (39 in.)
from the subject.
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury
due to broken glass and to
prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes or mouth.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any
product may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any language in any
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior
written permission.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
specifications of the hardware and
software described in these manuals at
any time and without prior notice.
damages resulting from the use of this
product.
• While every effort has been made to
ensure that the information in these
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring
any errors or omissions to the attention
of the Nikon representative in your area
(address provided separately).
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates that
this product is to be
collected separately.
This symbol on the battery
indicates that the battery is
to be collected separately.
The following apply only to
The following apply only to
users in European countries:
• This product is designated for separate
collection at an appropriate collection
point. Do not dispose of as household
waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
users in European countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with this
symbol or not, are designated for
separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as
household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug
adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This
power unit is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor
mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
CAUTIONS
Modifications
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
The FCC requires the user be notified that
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
any changes or modifications made to this
and used in accordance with the
device that are not expressly approved by
instructions, may cause harmful
Nikon Corporation may void the user’s
interference to radio communications.
authority to operate the equipment.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
The accessory power cord must be used
For USA only: Over AC 125 V
Use a power cord over AWG 18 in size
suited to the voltage in use with plugs
rated for AC 250 V 15 A (NEMA 6P-15)
and a minimum of SVT type cord for
insulation.
Power Supply Cord
Use a UL Listed, 1.8 to 3 m (6 to 10 ft),
SPT-2, AWG no. 18 power supply cord
rated for 125 V 7 A, with a non-polarized
NEMA 1-15P plug rated for 125 V 15 A.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
may expose you to lead, a chemical known Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
to the State of California to cause birth
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
destroying data storage devices.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or • Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
reproduced
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction of unused
postage stamps or post cards issued by
the government is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
copyrighted creative works such as
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
photographs is governed by national
and international copyright laws. Do
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
The copying or reproduction of stamps
issued by the government and of
certified documents stipulated by law
is prohibited.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including chargers,
batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use
with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the
operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC
STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO
PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR
ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
http://www.mpegla.com
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within
its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back
A See Also
For information on choosing a language and setting the time and
viewfinder focus.
Focus-mode selector
Rotate the focus-mode selector
to AF (autofocus).
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus, then
press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to take the photograph.
Focus indicator
K button
8 View the
photograph
xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xxiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
Introduction
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
• D4 digital
X
• BS-2 accessory shoe
cover (
• EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion
battery with terminal cover
• UC-E15 USB cable
• USB cable clip
• MH-26 battery charger with
power cable and two contact
• UF-2 connector
cover for stereo
mini plug cable
• Warranty
• Quick Guide
• Network Guide
• User’s Manual (this guide)
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Camera Body
X
1 D button
2 Release mode dial
lock release ....................................111
4 M button
10 E button
11 I/Q button
Exposure mode .........................125
Formatting memory cards ....... 36
Flash compensation.................202
5 Y button
16 Accessory shoe
17 Accessory shoe cover
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
1 Mirror..................................... 116, 402 13 USB connector..................... 267, 272
3 Microphone (for movies)
15 Connector for external
................................................65, 69, 75
microphone......................................69
5 Ten-pin remote terminal
cover ...................................... 231, 394
11 HDMI/Ethernet connector
cover ...................................... 269, 280
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1
Pv button
6 Vertical shooting shutter-release
Using the Pv button
button lock....................................... 42
Fn button (vertical)
7
3
Fn button
8 CPU contacts
Using the Fn button
4 Sub-command dial for
vertical shooting...........................336
5 Shutter-release button for
vertical shooting
11 Tripod socket
D The Microphone and Speaker
Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic
devices. Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data
recorded on the magnetic devices.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
3 O/Q button
Deletion ...............................47, 251
13 S button
Formatting memory cards........36
4 K button
6 G button
ISO sensitivity ........................... 117
Auto ISO sensitivity control... 119
Two-button reset ..................... 207
14 T button
15 U button
Menus...................................19, 283
Two-button reset ..................... 207
16 H button
7 L (Z/Q) button
Picture Controls........................ 173
Help................................................22
8 X button
Using the microphone
Playback zoom in..................... 247
9 W button
Thumbnails ............................... 235
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1 Viewfinder........................................ 38 12 Live view selector.................... 49, 63
2 Sub-selector
13 a button
3 B button
16 Ambient brightness sensor for
automatic monitor brightness
6 Card slot cover release button
8 C button
control...................................... 57, 345
Using the AF-ON button for
vertical shooting.......................312
11 Microphone
(for voice memos) ........................255
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Top Control Panel
1
9
10
2
3
11
4
5
6
7
8
12
13
X
Shutter speed...........................127, 129
Number of exposures remaining
1
8
Exposure compensation value .....137
Number of shots in
exposure and flash bracketing
sequence............................................141
Number of shots in
WB bracketing sequence ...............145
HDR exposure differential..............190
Number of exposures (multiple
exposure) ...........................................212
Number of intervals for
........................................................41, 444
Number of shots remaining before
Capture mode indicator................. 265
9
10
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence............................................ 149
Number of shots per interval........ 220
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 230
PC mode indicator........................... 269
Battery indicator .................................40
interval timer photography...........220
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....230
ISO sensitivity....................................117
Flexible program indicator ............126
11
12
2
3
4
5
6
7
Preset white balance
Exposure mode.................................125
Shooting menu bank ......................294
Custom settings bank .....................305
XQD card indicator.......................35, 36
CompactFlash card indicator ....35, 36
recording indicator.......................... 165
Manual lens number....................... 230
Time-lapse recording indicator.... 226
“K” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures) ..................41
13
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
23
24
14
15
16
25
26
27
17
18
19
28
29
30
20
21
31
X
Exposure and flash
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
30
31
bracketing indicator........................ 141
WB bracketing indicator ................ 145
ADL bracketing indicator............... 149
Exposure indicator .......................... 130
Exposure compensation
display ................................................ 137
Bracketing progress indicator:
ADL bracketing.............................. 149
PC connection indicator ................ 265
3D-tracking indicator.............100, 102
Autofocus mode................................. 97
21
22
23
24
Multiple exposure (series)
25
26
27
28
Exposure compensation
29
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Rear Control Panel
1
6
2
7
8
9
3
4
5
10
11
X
“Remaining” indicator ....................321
Image quality (JPEG images) ...........90
1
2
3
6
7
Voice memo recording
indicator (shooting mode) ............ 256
Voice memo status
Voice memo recording
mode................................................... 256
White balance................................... 153
White balance fine-tuning
indicator............................................. 159
White balance preset protection
indicator............................................. 171
Secondary slot function....................95
Image quality.......................................90
ISO sensitivity indicator..................117
Auto ISO sensitivity
8
9
indicator .............................................121
ISO sensitivity....................................117
ISO sensitivity (high/low gain)......118
Length of voice memo....................258
White balance fine-tuning.............159
White balance preset number ......164
PC mode indicator ...........................265
“K” (appears when memory remains
for over 1000 exposures).................. 41
Color temperature indicator .........162
4
10
11
5
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch toward
D
Power switch
activates the standby timer, control
panel backlights (LCD illuminators),
making it easier to use the camera in
the dark. After the power switch is
released, the backlights will remain
lit for six seconds while the standby
timer is active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is
rotated toward again.
D
X
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Viewfinder Display
1
2
3
4
5
X
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
13
14 15 16
17
18
25
19 20
21
22
23
24
1 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d6)
.......................................................... 321
2 12-mm reference circle for center-
weighted metering ..................... 123
Spot metering targets ................ 123
AF-area mode indicator ............. 101
Exposure compensation display
.......................................................... 137
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing.................................. 141
WB bracketing .......................... 145
ADL bracketing......................... 149
6 Exposure compensation
indicator......................................... 137
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Bracketing indicator:
Number of exposures
Exposure and flash
bracketing ..................................139
WB bracketing...........................145
ADL bracketing .........................149
Aperture
Active D-Lighting amount .........332
Number of shots remaining before
Preset white balance
recording indicator ......................165
Flash compensation value .........202
PC mode indicator........................265
20 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
X
exposures)........................................ 41
21 Flash-ready indicator 3
1
2
3
Functions as a pitch indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall”
(portrait) orientation.
Functions as a roll indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait)
orientation.
lights when the flash is charged.
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully-
charged battery is inserted.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display
Shooting information, including shutter
speed, aperture, frame count, number of
exposures remaining, and AF-area mode, is
displayed in the monitor when the R button
is pressed.
R button
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
21
20
X
10
19
18
17
11
16
15 14 13
12
Exposure mode.................................125
Flexible program indicator ............126
Shutter-speed lock icon .................133
Number of shots in ADL bracketing
sequence............................................ 149
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ............................. 230
Exposure indicator........................... 130
Bracketing progress indicator:
WB bracketing ............................... 145
ADL bracketing.............................. 149
1
2
3
4
6
Exposure compensation value .....137
Number of shots in exposure and
flash bracketing sequence.............141
Number of shots in WB bracketing
sequence............................................145
Number of exposures (multiple
7
8
exposure) ...........................................212
Focal length (non-CPU lenses) .....230
Multiple exposure indicator ..........211
5
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Position of current frame in
Number of exposures
Exposure and flash
9
17
18
“K” (appears when memory
bracketing indicator........................ 141
WB bracketing indicator ................ 145
ADL bracketing indicator............... 149
Focus points indicator .................... 103
Flash mode........................................ 199
10
remains for over 1000
exposures) ........................................... 41
Sub-selector center
11
12
19
20
21
13
14
15
Flash sync indicator......................... 323
X
High ISO noise reduction
16
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the
R
button twice
more or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off
automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see
changing the color of the lettering in the information display, see
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display (Continued)
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
29
30
31
32
33
34
46
45
44
35
36
37
43
42
41 40
39
38
X
Release mode indicator..................111
FV lock indicator...............................205
Flash compensation indicator ...... 202
Battery indicator .................................40
22
34
35
36
23
24
25
HDR indicator ................................... 187
HDR exposure differential ............. 190
Picture Control indicator................ 174
Interval timer indicator...................220
Time-lapse indicator .......................226
GPS connection indicator ..............233
37
38
Function assigned to Fn button
(vert.) .................................................. 334
26
27
28
39
40
41
Aperture lock icon ...........................134
HDR (series) indicator .....................190
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator .............................................212
Long exposure noise reduction
indicator............................................. 302
Custom settings bank..................... 305
42
43
44
45
46
29
30
Vignette control indicator ............. 300
Image area indicator..........................85
Metering ............................................ 123
Copyright information
indicator .............................................353
31
32
33
Network display ...............................269
Exposure compensation
indicator .............................................137
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Changing Settings in the Information Display
To change settings for the items listed below,
press the R button in the information
display. Highlight items using the multi
selector and press J to view options for the
highlighted item.
R button
X
6
7
reduction........................................302
4
5 Sub-selector center
A Tool Tips
A tool tip giving the name of the selected item
appears in the information display. Tool tips can
be turned off using Custom Setting d8 (Screen
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BS-2 Accessory Shoe Cover
The supplied BS-2 accessory shoe
cover can be used to protect the
accessory shoe or to prevent light
reflected from the metal parts of
the shoe from appearing in
photographs. The BS-2 attaches to
the camera accessory shoe as shown at right.
To remove the accessory shoe
cover, hold it down with your
thumb and slide it off as shown at
right while keeping a firm grip on
the camera.
X
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s
Tutorial
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus. To
view the menus, press the G button.
G button
s
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• O/m: My Menu or Recent settings
Slider shows position in current menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
d
If d icon is displayed, help for current item can be viewed by pressing
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Camera Menus
❚❚Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.
Multi selector
Select
highlighted
item
Move cursor up
Select
Cancel and return
to previous menu
highlighted
item or display
sub-menu
J button
Select highlighted
item
Move cursor down
s
❚❚Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
G button
Press the G button to display the
menus.
2 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4to highlight the icon
for the current menu.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1or 3to select the desired menu.
4 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
s
Press 2to position the cursor
in the selected menu.
5 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1or 3to highlight a
menu item.
6 Display options.
Press 2to display options for
the selected menu item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1or 3to highlight an
option.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item. To
exit without making a selection, press the
G button.
J button
Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2or the center of the multi selector generally has
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which
selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
s
Help
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left
corner of the monitor, help can be displayed
by pressing the L (Z/Q) button.
A description of the currently
selected option or menu will
be displayed while the button
is pressed. Press 1or 3to
scroll through the display.
L (Z/Q) button
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Steps
Charge the Battery
The D4 is powered by an EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion battery
(supplied). To maximize shooting time, charge the battery in the
supplied MH-26 battery charger before use. About two hours and
twenty minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no
charge remains.
1 Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the
battery charger and plug the power
cable into an electrical outlet.
s
2 Remove the terminal cover.
Remove the terminal cover from the
battery.
Terminal cover
3 Remove the contact protector.
Remove the contact protector from the
charger battery chamber.
A See Also
For information on using the MH-26 to charge two batteries, see page
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Charge the battery.
Contacts
Chamber
lamps
Charge
lamps
(green)
Guide
Insert the battery (terminals first), aligning the end of the
battery with the guide and then sliding the battery in the
direction indicated until it clicks into place. The chamber lamp
and charge lamps will flash slowly while the battery charges:
s
Charge lamps
80%
Chamber
lamp
Charge state
50%
100%
H(flashes H(flashes
Less than 50% of maximum capacity
I (off)
I (off)
slowly)
slowly)
H(flashes
slowly)
H(flashes
slowly)
50–80% of maximum capacity
K (glows)
I (off)
More than 80% but less than 100% of
maximum capacity
100% of maximum capacity
H(flashes
H(flashes
K (glows) K (glows)
I (off)
slowly)
slowly)
K (glows) I (off)
I (off)
Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops flashing
and the charge lamps turn off. About two hours and twenty
minutes are required to fully charge an exhausted battery;
note that the battery will not charge if its temperature is
below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
5 Remove the battery when charging is complete.
Remove the battery and unplug the charger.
D Calibration
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert the Battery
1 Turn the camera off.
D Inserting and Removing
Batteries
Always turn the camera off
before inserting or removing
batteries.
2 Remove the battery-chamber cover.
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn it
s
to the open (
A) position (q) and remove
the BL-6 battery-chamber cover (
w).
3 Attach the cover to the battery.
If the battery release is positioned so that
the arrow (4) is visible, slide the battery
release to cover the arrow. Insert the two
projections on the battery into the
matching slots in the cover and slide the
battery release to completely reveal the
arrow.
D The BL-6 Battery-Chamber Cover
The battery can be charged with the BL-6 attached. To prevent dust
from accumulating inside the battery chamber when the battery is not
inserted, slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow
(4), remove the BL-6 from the battery, and replace it on the camera.
Other battery covers can not be used with this camera.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.
5 Latch the cover.
To prevent the battery from
becoming dislodged during
operation, rotate the latch to
the closed position and fold it
down as shown at right. Be
sure the cover is securely
latched.
s
A Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off,
lift the battery-chamber cover latch, and turn it
to the open (A) position. Note that the battery
may be hot after use; observe due caution when
removing the battery. To prevent short-circuits,
replace the terminal cover when the battery is
not in use.
D EN-EL18 Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL18 shares information with compatible devices,
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge,
battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D The Battery and Charger
of this manual. Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe this precaution could
damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C/
32 °F to 15 °C/59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to 60 °C/140 °F.
Do not short the charger terminals; failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger. Charge indoors
at ambient temperatures of 5–35°C/41–95 °F. Battery capacity may
temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low temperatures or used
at a temperature below the temperature at which it was charged. If the
battery is charged at a temperature below 5 °C (41 °F), the battery life
decrease.
s
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to
cool before recharging.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in
use.
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL18 battery.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed. The lens generally used in this manual
for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G.
Mounting index
Lens cap
s
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting index on the lens aligned with the
mounting index on the camera body, position the lens in the
camera’s bayonet mount (q). Being careful not to press the
lens-release button, rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it
clicks into place (w).
s
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or
M/A-M mode switch, select A
(autofocus) or M/A (autofocus with
manual priority).
D Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After removing
the lens, replace the lens caps and camera
body cap.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
A Image Area
The DX format image area is automatically
Image area
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Setup
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language
and set the time and date.
1 Turn the camera on.
Power switch
s
2 Select Language in the
G button
setup menu.
Press G to display the
camera menus, then select
Language in the setup menu.
For information on using
menus, see “Using Camera
3 Select a language.
Press 1or 3to highlight
the desired language and
press J.
J button
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select Time zone and date.
Select Time zone and date
and press 2.
5 Set time zone.
Select Time zone and press 2.
Press 4or 2to highlight the
local time zone (the UTC field
shows the difference between
the selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or
UTC, in hours) and press J.
s
6 Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Select Daylight saving time
and press 2. Daylight saving
time is off by default; if daylight
saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1to
highlight On and press J.
7 Set the date and time.
Select Date and time and
press 2. Press 4or 2to select
an item, 1or 3to change.
Press J when the clock is set to
the current date and time.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Set date format.
Select Date format and press
2. Press 1or 3to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed and
press J.
9 Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.
s
A The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616
lithium battery with a life of about two years. When this battery is low, a
B icon will be displayed in the top control panel while the standby
timer is on. For information on replacing the clock battery, see page
406.
A The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insert a Memory Card
The camera is equipped with two card slots, one for XQD and the
other for Type I CompactFlash cards. Type II cards and microdrives
can not be used.
1 Turn the camera off.
Power switch
s
D Inserting and Removing Memory Cards
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory
cards.
2 Open the card slot cover.
Open the door protecting the card-slot
cover release button (q) and press the
release button (w) to open the card slot
(e).
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Insert the memory card.
XQD memory cards: Holding the card with
the rear label toward the monitor, slide it
into the XQD card slot until it clicks into
place. The green access lamp will light
briefly.
Access lamp
Eject button
CompactFlash memory cards: Insert the card
into the CompactFlash card slot with the
rear label toward the monitor (q). When
the memory card is fully inserted, the
eject button will pop up (w) and the
green access lamp will light briefly.
s
D Inserting Memory Cards
Insert the memory card terminals first. Inserting the card upside
down or backwards could damage the camera or the card. Check
to be sure that the card is in the correct orientation.
XQD card
CompactFlash card
Direction of
insertion for
right
Direction of
insertion for
left (XQD)
card slot
G B
4
(Compact-
Flash) card
slot
Rear label
Rear label
4 Close the card slot cover.
If this is the first time the memory card
will be used after being used or
formatted in another device, format the
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Memory Card Icons
The memory cards currently inserted in the
camera are indicated as shown (the example at
right shows the icons displayed when both an
XQD and a CompactFlash card are inserted). If
the memory card is full or an error has occurred,
Top control panel
A Using Two Memory Cards
when two cards are inserted in the camera.
A Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the access lamp is off, turn the camera off and
open the memory card slot cover.
s
XQD memory cards: Press the card in to eject it (q).
The memory card can then be removed by hand.
CompactFlash memory cards: Press the eject button
(q) to partially eject the card (w). The memory
card can then be removed by hand. Do not push
on the memory card while pressing the eject
button. Failure to observe this precaution could
damage the camera or memory card.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Format the Memory Card
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being
used or formatted in other devices.
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
1 Turn the camera on.
2 Press the I (Q) and O
O (Q) button I(Q) button
s
(Q) buttons.
Hold the I (Q) and O (Q)
buttons down simultaneously
until a flashing C appears
in the shutter-speed displays
in the top control panel and
viewfinder. If two memory
cards are inserted, the card to
be formatted is shown by a
flashing icon. By default, the
be selected; you can choose
the secondary slot by rotating
the main command dial. To exit without formatting the
memory card, wait until C stops flashing (about six
seconds) or press any button other than the I (Q) and
O (Q) buttons.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons again.
Press the I (Q) and O (Q) buttons together a second time
while C is flashing to format the memory card. Do not
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the top
control panel will show the number of
photographs that can be recorded at
current settings and the frame-count
displays will show B.
s
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
A No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the top control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the
camera is turned off with a charged EN-EL18
battery and no memory card inserted, S
will be displayed in the top control panel.
A See Also
Format memory card option in the setup menu.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.
1 Turn the camera on.
Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on.
2 Lift the diopter adjustment control
(q).
s
3 Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter adjustment control
(w) until the viewfinder display, focus
points, and AF area brackets are in sharp
focus. When operating the control with
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful
not to put your fingers or fingernails in
your eye.
AF area brackets
Focus point
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replace the diopter adjustment
control.
Push the diopter adjustment control
back in (e).
s
A Adjusting Viewfinder Focus
If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above, select
the center focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway to
focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment
control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. If
necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional
A Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
can be used to further adjust viewfinder
diopter. Before attaching a diopter-adjustment
viewfinder lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder
eyepiece by closing the viewfinder shutter to
release the eyepiece lock (q) and then
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right (w).
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Photography and Playback
Turn the Camera On
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.
1 Turn the camera on.
Power switch
Turn the camera on. The
control panels will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.
s
2 Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the top control
panel or viewfinder.
Icon *
Control panel
L
Viewfinder
Description
Battery fully charged.
—
—
—
—
K
J
Battery partially discharged.
I
Low battery. Charge battery or ready
spare battery.
H
d
H
(flashes)
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
(flashes) exchange battery.
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP-6 power
connector and EH-6b AC adapter.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Check the number of exposures remaining.
The top control panel shows the
number of photographs that can be
taken at current settings (values over
1,000 are rounded down to the
nearest hundred; e.g., values between
2,900 and 2,999 are shown as 2.9 K). If
two memory cards are inserted, the
displays show the space available on
When this number reaches zero, A will
flash in the exposure-count displays
while the shutter-speed displays will
show a flashing n or j and the
icon for the affected card will flash.
Insert another memory card or delete
some photos.
s
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ready the Camera
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right
hand and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left. Keep your elbows propped
lightly against your torso for support and
place one foot half a pace ahead of the
other to keep your upper body stable.
When framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation, hold the camera as shown in
the bottom of the three illustrations at right.
s
D Framing Photos in Portrait (Tall) Orientation
The camera is equipped with controls
for use in portrait (tall) orientation,
including a vertical shutter-release, Fn,
and B buttons, main and sub-
command dials, and multi selector
shooting shutter-release button lock
to L to avoid accidentally operating
these controls when the camera is in
landscape (wide) orientation.
Vertical shooting shutter-
release button lock
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus and Shoot
1 Press the shutter-
Focus point
release button
At default settings, the
camera will focus on the
subject in the center
focus point. Frame a
photo in the viewfinder
with the main subject
positioned in the center
Focus
indicator
Buffer
capacity
s
focus point and press the shutter-release button halfway.
2 Check indicators in the viewfinder.
When the focus operation is complete, the in-focus indicator
(I) will appear in the viewfinder.
Viewfinder display
I
Description
Subject in focus.
2
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
4
2 4
(flashes)
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
will be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter-
release-button the rest of the
way down to release the
shutter and record the
Access lamp
photograph. While the
photograph is being recorded
to the memory card, the access lamp will light. Do not eject the
memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the
lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
s
A The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus
Take photograph
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Standby Timer
The shutter speed and aperture displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about six
seconds, reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-release
Exposure meters on Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can
s
A The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to select the
focus point while the exposure meters are on
Multi selector
A Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card icon,
frame count, and number of exposures
remaining will be displayed (some memory
cards may in rare cases only display this
information when the camera is on).
Top control panel
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Photographs
1 Press the K button.
K button
A photograph will be
displayed in the monitor.
The memory card
containing the picture
currently displayed is
shown by an icon.
2 View additional pictures.
s
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
N
I
KO
N
D4
1/12
.
1
125 F5
6
100
50mm
/
0,
0
_
.
100NC_D4
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
MAL
492N8Ox3R280
:
15
/
04
/
2011 10 02 27
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A Image Review
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting.
A See Also
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Unwanted Photographs
Unwanted photographs can be deleted by pressing the O (Q)
button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described in “Viewing
Photographs” on the previous page. The
location of the current image is shown
by an icon at the bottom left corner of
the display.
s
2 Delete the photograph. O (Q) button
Press the O (Q) button. A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight
Selected image and press
O (Q) again to delete the
image and return to
playback (for information on the All images option, see page
A Delete
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
Live View Photography
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to
C (live view photography).
Live view selector
x
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor. The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
3 Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described on
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Focus.
B button
Press the shutter-release button
halfway or press the B
button to focus.
The focus point will flash green while the
camera focuses. If the camera is able to
focus, the focus point will be displayed in
green; if the camera is unable to focus,
the focus point will flash red (note that
pictures can be taken even when the
focus point flashes red; check focus in the
monitor before shooting). Exposure can
Center of sub-
selector
x
focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
A Exposure Preview
During live view photography, you can
press J to preview the effects of shutter
speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity on
exposure. Exposure can be adjusted by
between –3 and +3 EV are reflected in the
preview display. Note that the preview
may not accurately reflect the final results when flash lighting is
shutter speed. If the subject is very bright or very dark, the
exposure indicators will flash to warn that the preview may not
accurately reflect exposure. Exposure preview is not available
when A is selected for shutter speed.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to shoot. The monitor
will turn off.
6 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with
other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view, autofocus is
slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera
focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green
when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be unable to
focus in the following situations:
x
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g.,
blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focusing in Live View
To focus using autofocus, rotate the
focus-mode selector to AF and
follow the steps below to choose
autofocus and AF-area modes. For
information on focusing manually,
see page 59.
Focus-mode selector
❚❚Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available in live view:
Mode
AF-S
Description
Single-servo autofocus: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
Full-time servo autofocus: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
AF-F continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks
x
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed
in the monitor.
AF-mode
button
Main command
dial
Monitor
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Choosing an AF-Area Mode
The following AF-area modes can be selected in live view:
Mode
Description
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically detects
and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is indicated
by a double yellow border (if multiple faces, up to a maximum of
35, are detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to
choose a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera
can no longer detect the subject (because, for example, the
subject has turned to face away from the camera), the border will
no longer be displayed.
!
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other non-
portrait subjects. Use the multi selector to move the focus point
anywhere in the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to
position the focus point in the center of the frame.
Normal-area AF: Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the
frame. Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in
the frame, or press the center of the multi selector to position the
focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is recommended.
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and
press the center of the multi selector. The focus point will track the
selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end tracking,
press the center of the multi selector again.
5
6
x
&
D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave
the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color,
or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar
in color or brightness to the background.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Live View Display: Live View
Photography
e
r
q
w
t
y
u
x
Item
Description
0
The amount of time remaining before live
view ends automatically. Displayed if
shooting will end in 30 s or less.
Displayed if monitor hue differs from the hue
produced by the current white balance
setting.
Time remaining
q
w
Monitor hue
indicator
Autofocus mode
AF-area mode
The current autofocus mode.
The current AF-area mode.
e
r
The current focus point. The display varies
with the option selected for AF-area mode.
Focus point
t
y
u
Monitor brightness
indicator
A monitor brightness indicator.
A guide to the options available during live
view photography.
Guide
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Adjusting Monitor Hue
If flash lighting is used with Flash or Preset manual white balance
photograph. Monitor hue can be adjusted to reduce the effects of
ambient lighting on the display in the monitor during live view
photography, for example when using a flash.
1 Highlight the monitor hue
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4or 2to
highlight the monitor hue indicator at
the left side of the display.
W button
x
2 Adjust monitor hue.
Keeping the W button pressed,
rotate the main command dial
to adjust monitor hue (select --
to preview the hue of the final
photograph in the monitor; if another option is selected when
Quiet is chosen for Live view photography in the shooting
photography will differ from that seen in the final image).
Monitor hue is reset when the camera is turned off.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Recalling Monitor Hue
To restore the most recently selected hue when starting live view,
hold the U button while pressing a.
A Choosing a Picture Control
Pressing L (Z/Q) during
live view displays a list of
Picture Controls. Highlight
the desired Picture Control
and press 2to adjust
Picture Control settings
L (Z/Q) button
❚❚Adjusting Monitor Brightness
Monitor brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
brightness adjustment is not available during exposure preview.
x
1 Highlight the monitor brightness
indicator.
Press and hold W and press 4or 2to
highlight the monitor brightness
indicator at the right side of the
W button
display.
2 Adjust monitor brightness.
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1or 3to adjust monitor brightness
(note that monitor brightness has no effect on photographs
taken with the camera). If A (auto) is selected and the monitor
is on, the camera will automatically adjust brightness in
response to ambient lighting conditions as measured by the
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display: Live View
Photography
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during live view
photography, press the R button.
Virtual horizon
Information on
Information off
x
Histogram
(exposure
preview only;
Framing
guides
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Focus
rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is
in focus.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to
about 15 × for precise focus, press the X
button. While the view through the lens is
zoomed in, a navigation window will appear
in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of
the display. Use the multi selector to scroll
to areas of the frame not visible in the
monitor (available only if wide- or normal-
area AF is selected for AF-area mode), or
press W to zoom out.
X button
x
Navigation window
A Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses, be sure to enter the focal length and
maximum aperture using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup
A Exposure
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would be
obtained when live view is not used. Metering in live view is adjusted to
suit the live view display, producing photographs with exposure close
to what is seen in the monitor.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Live View Shutter Release Options
The following options can be displayed by pressing G and
selecting Live view photography in the shooting menu:
Mode
Description
Except when an optional flash unit is used, the mirror
Quiet remains up during live view photography, reducing noise
during shooting. The noise of the shutter is still audible.
The mirror remains up and the shutter stays open during live
M
view photography for less noise than Quiet mode;
L
is
displayed in the monitor. While the shutter-release button is
pressed, the camera will take up to five seconds of JPEG
photos at about 12 fps in continuous low-speed release
mode, or at about 24 fps in continuous high-speed release
mode; the time remaining is shown in the frame-count
Silent display. In other release modes, one photo will be taken
each time the shutter-release button is pressed. ISO
x
L
sensitivity is set automatically except in exposure mode
when you can choose from values between ISO 200 and Hi 4
between the selected by the camera and the value you have
selected, press
h,
(
J.
A Silent Mode
image quality is fixed at JPEG fine. Image size is determined solely by
the option selected for Image area and is unaffected by the option
selected for Image size:
• FX (36 × 24) 1.0×: 1,920 × 1,280
• DX (24 × 16) 1.5×: 1,280 × 848
• 1.2× (30 × 20) 1.2×: 1,600 × 1,064
• 5 : 4 (30 × 24): 1,600 × 1,280
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure preview is not available, matrix metering is selected
automatically, and the following settings can be adjusted.
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity
e, f
g
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
h
Note that silent mode is not completely silent: the shutter sounds and the
mirror is raised and lowered at the start and end of live view photography.
D The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for
is due to turn off automatically). Depending on shooting conditions,
the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected. Note that
although the count down does not appear during playback, live view
will still end automatically when the timer expires.
x
A HDMI
If the camera is connected to an HDMI
video device during live view
photography, the camera monitor will
remain on and the video device will
display the view through the lens as
shown at right. Press the R button to
A See Also
For information on choosing the roles played by the center of the multi
selector and by the movie-record button and command dials, see
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Shooting in Live View Mode
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
Although they will not appear in the final picture unless Silent is
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs and other
intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a
strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In addition, distortion
may occur if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at
high speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the
monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be
visible in the final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting
in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong
light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage
to the camera’s internal circuitry.
x
Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed, the live view
selector is rotated to a new setting, or the G button is pressed.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not use. Note that the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed in the
following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but
this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
Movie recording is not available during live view photography and
pressing the movie-record button has no effect. Select movie live view
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y
Movie Live View
Movies can be recorded in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to 1
(movie live view).
Live view selector
2 Press the a button.
y
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in the
camera monitor, modified for the effects
of exposure. The subject will no longer
be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
D The 0 Icon
A Before Recording
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Focus.
B button
Frame the opening shot and focus as
described in Steps 3 and 4 on pages 49–
50 (for more information on focusing in
the number of subjects that can be
detected in face-priority AF drops in
movie live view.
y
A Exposure Mode
The following settings can be adjusted in movie live view:
Aperture Shutter speed ISO sensitivity Exposure compensation
e, f
g
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
h
In exposure mode
1/25 s and 1/8,000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with
adjusted automatically. If the subject is over- or under-exposed in
mode or , end live view and start movie live view again or select
exposure and adjust aperture.
h, shutter speed can be set to values between
e
f
g
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and the
time available are displayed in the
monitor. Exposure is set using matrix
metering and can be locked by pressing
altered by up to 3 EV using exposure
mode, the camera can be refocused by
pressing the AF-ON button.
Movie-record button
Recording indicator
Time remaining
y
A Audio
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording.
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the
lens during autofocus, vibration reduction, or changes to aperture.
A See Also
Frame size, microphone sensitivity, card slot, and ISO sensitivity
played by the center of the multi selector, the Fn and Pv buttons,
and the center of the sub-selector can be chosen using Custom
release button can be used to start movie live view, or to start and
end movie recording, or (when pressed all the way down) to take
photographs during movie recording.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again to
end recording. Recording will end
automatically when the maximum length
is reached, or the memory card is full.
A Maximum Length
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for
memory card write speed, shooting may end before this length is
reached.
A Taking Photographs
To take a photograph while recording is in progress, press the
shutter-release button all the way down. Movie recording will end
(the footage recorded to that point will be saved) and the camera
will return to live view. Except at a frame size of 640 × 424, the
photograph will be recorded at the current image area setting with
an aspect ratio of 16 : 9. Note that the exposure for photographs
can not be previewed during movie live view; mode e, f, or g is
recommended but accurate results can be achieved in mode h by
ending live view photography, starting movie live view, and
checking the image area. Exposure compensation for the
photograph can be set to values between –5 and +5 EV, but only
values between –3 and +3 can be previewed in the monitor
y
D Frame Size
The area used for metering exposure or auto white balance when
photographs are recorded at a movie frame size of 1920 × 1080;
30 fps; crop, 1920 × 1080; 25 fps; crop, or 1920 × 1080; 24 fps;
with the result that optimal results may not be achieved. Take test
shots and check the results in the monitor.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Exit live view mode.
Press the a button to exit live view
mode.
Indices
If Index marking is selected for Custom
you can press the Pv button during recording
to add indices that can be used to locate
Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie.
Pv button
y
Index
D The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically
immediately when movie recording begins. Note that regardless of the
amount of recording time available, live view will still end automatically
when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits to cool before
resuming movie recording.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Live View Display: Movie Live View
t
q
y
w
e
r
u
i
Item
“No movie” icon
Description
0
—
Indicates that movies can not be recorded.
q
w
Headphone volume Volume of audio output to headphones.
y
Microphone
sensitivity
Microphone sensitivity for movie recording.
e
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed
in red if level is too high; adjust microphone
Sound level
sensitivity accordingly. Left (L) and right (R)
channel indicators appear when optional
ME-1 or other stereo microphone is used.
r
Movie frame size The frame size for movie recording.
t
y
Time remaining
The recording time available for movies.
(movie live view)
Monitor brightness
A monitor brightness indicator.
indicator
u
i
A guide to the options available during
movie live view.
Guide
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Adjusting Settings in the Live View Display
Microphone sensitivity, headphone volume, and monitor
brightness can be adjusted as described below. Note that
microphone sensitivity and headphone volume can not be
adjusted during recording, and that brightness affects the monitor
1 Highlight a setting.
Press and hold W and press 4or 2to
highlight the indicator for the desired
setting.
W button
2 Adjust the highlighted setting.
y
Keeping the W button pressed, press
1or 3to adjust the highlighted
setting.
A Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in
A Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when
headphones are used.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Information Display: Movie Live View
To hide or display indicators in the monitor during movie live view,
press the R button.
Virtual horizon
Information on
Information off
Histogram
Framing
guides
y
A HDMI
If the camera is connected to an HDMI
will appear both in the camera monitor
and on the HDMI device. The indicators
that appear in the HDMI device during
movie recording are shown at right. The
camera monitor does not show the sound level, virtual horizon, or
histogram; indicators in the monitor and on the HDMI device can not be
hidden or displayed using the R button.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Area
Regardless of the option selected for Image area in the shooting
view have an aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (or 3 : 2 when the movie frame
size is 640 × 424). Images recorded with On selected for Image
area > Auto DX crop and a DX lens attached use a DX-based
movie format, as do images recorded with DX (24×16) 1.5×
selected for Image area > Choose image area. Other images use
an FX-based movie format. A a icon is displayed when the DX-
based movie format is selected. The differences between the
photography and movie live view photo crop are shown below.
Crop for viewfinder and live view
photography
y
16 : 9 photo crop for movie live view
Crop for viewfinder and live view
photography
3 : 2 photo crop for movie live view
The size of the area at the center of the image sensor used to
record photographs taken in movie live view is 35.0 × 19.7 mm
(16 : 9, FX-based movie format), 22.4 × 12.6 mm (16 : 9, DX-based
movie format), 35.0 × 23.4 mm (3 : 2, FX-based movie format), or
22.4 × 14.9 mm (3 : 2, DX-based movie format).
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Movie Live View Photographs
The following table shows the size of photographs (aspect ratio 16 : 9)
taken in movie live view at frame sizes other than 640 × 424:
Image area
Option
Large
Size (pixels)
4,928 × 2,768 41.7 × 23.4/16.4 × 9.2
Print size (cm/in.) *
FX-based format
(16 : 9)
Medium 3,696 × 2,072 31.3 × 17.5/12.3 × 6.9
Small
Large
Medium 2,400 × 1,344 20.3 × 11.4/ 8.0 × 4.5
Small
2,464 × 1,384 20.9 × 11.7/ 8.2 × 4.6
3,200 × 1,792 27.1 × 15.2/10.7 × 6.0
DX-based format
(16 : 9)
1,600 × 896 13.5 × 7.6/ 5.3 × 3.0
1920 × 1080;
30 fps/25 fps/
24 fps; crop
—
1,920 × 1,080 16.3 × 9.1/ 6.4 × 3.6
The following table shows the size of photographs (aspect ratio 3 : 2)
taken in movie live view at frame sizes of 640 × 424:
y
Image area
Option
Large
Size (pixels)
4,928 × 3,280 41.7 × 27.8/16.4 × 10.9
Print size (cm/in.) *
FX-based movie
format (3 : 2)
Medium 3,696 × 2,456 31.3 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
Small
Large
2,464 × 1,640 20.9 × 13.9/ 8.2 × 5.5
3,200 × 2,128 27.1 × 18.0/10.7 × 7.1
DX-based movie
format (3 : 2)
Medium 2,400 × 1,592 20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
Small 1,600 × 1,064 13.5 × 9.0/ 5.3 × 3.5
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image quality is determined by the option selected for Image quality
ARemote Cords
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g4 (Assign shutter
can be used to start movie live view and to start and end movie
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Recording Movies
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed
through frame (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see
bright spots may also appear. Bright bands may appear in some areas
of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if
the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary
light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the
sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry. Note that
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected
during movie live view.
Flash lighting can not be used during movie live view.
y
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or the live view
selector is rotated to a new setting. Movie live view ends when the G
button is pressed.
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not use. Note that the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise (bright
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed in the
following instances (the camera may also become noticeably warm, but
this does not indicate a malfunction):
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Movie Settings
Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to adjust the
following settings.
• Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the following
options:
Maximum bit rate (Mbps)
Maximum
length
Option 1
★ high quality
Normal
1920 × 1080; 30 fps 2, 3
1920 × 1080; 25 fps 2, 3
1920 × 1080; 24 fps 2, 3
1280 × 720; 60 fps 3
1280 × 720; 50 fps 3
1280 × 720; 30 fps
1280 × 720; 25 fps
640 × 424; 30 fps
640 × 424; 25 fps
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
o
p
8
9
!
24
12
12
5
8
3
29 min. 59 s
y
1920 × 1080; 30 fps; crop 3, 4
1920 × 1080; 25 fps; crop 3, 4
1920 × 1080; 24 fps; crop 3, 4
24
12
1
Actual frame rate is 29.97 fps for values listed as 30 fps, 23.976 fps for values listed
as 24 fps, and 59.94 fps for values listed as 60 fps.
2
In DX-based movie format, image quality is equivalent to movies recorded at a
frame size of 1280 × 720.
3
4
Maximum length for ★ High quality movies is 20 minutes.
Matrix metering selected automatically. Picture angle equivalent to a focal length
2.7× FX-based movie format length, allowing a telephoto effect without changing
to a longer lens; h is displayed in the monitor. Photographs taken at this setting
are stored as JPEG fine images 1,920 × 1,080 pixels in size; HDR is not available
D Frame Size and Rate
Frame size and rate affects the distribution and amount of noise
(randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots).
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1
stereo microphones on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity. Choose Auto
sensitivity to adjust sensitivity
automatically, Microphone off to turn
sound recording off; to select microphone
sensitivity manually, select Manual sensitivity and choose a
sensitivity.
• Destination: Choose the slot to which movies
are recorded. The menu shows the time
available on each card; recording ends
automatically when no time remains. Note
that regardless of the option selected,
photographs are recorded to the card in the
• ISO sensitivity range: Choose the range of ISO
sensitivities available during movie
recording. Note that at high ISO sensitivities
the camera may have trouble focusing and
noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog,
or lines) may increase.
y
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Select Movie settings.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Movie settings in
the shooting menu and
press 2.
2 Choose movie options.
Highlight the desired item
and press 2, then highlight
an option and press J.
y
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Movies
Press the center of the multi selector to start playback.
1 icon
Length
Current position/total length
Guide
Movie progress Volume
bar
The following operations can be performed:
y
To
Use
Description
Pause
Pause playback.
Resume playback when movie is paused or
during rewind/advance.
Play
Speed increases with
each press, from 2× to
4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to
beginning or end of movie (first frame is
Rewind/
advance
indicated by
h
in top right corner of monitor,
last frame by i). If playback is paused, movie
rewinds or advances one frame at a time; hold
for continuous rewind or advance.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To
Use
Description
Use main command dial to skip to next or
previous index, or to skip to the last or first
frame if the movie contains no indices (if the
movie is more than 30 s long, rotating the
main command dial when the last frame is
displayed skips back 30 s.).
Skip ahead/
back
Adjust volume
Trim movie
/W
J
Press to increase volume, W to decrease.
X
X
Return to
shooting mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway to
exit to shooting mode.
Display menus
Exit
G
/K Exit to full-frame playback.
y
A The p Icon
p icon in full-frame playback.
A The 2 Icon
2 is displayed in full-frame and movie playback if
the movie was recorded without sound.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Option
Description
Create a copy from which the opening or closing
footage has been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
9
4
Choose start/end point
Save selected frame
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full
K button
frame.
y
Press the K button to
display pictures full frame
in the monitor and press 4
and 2to scroll through
pictures until the movie you
wish to edit is displayed.
2 Choose a starting or end
point.
Play the movie back as
described on page 77,
pressing the center of the
multi selector to start and
resume playback and 3to
Movie progress bar
pause, or rotating the main command dial to skip to an index
ascertained from the movie progress bar.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Display movie edit
options.
Press J to display movie
edit options.
J button
4 Select Choose start/end
point.
Highlight Choose start/
end point and press J.
The dialog shown at right
will be displayed; choose
whether the current frame
will be the starting or end
point of the copy and press
J.
y
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Delete frames.
If the desired frame is not
currently displayed, press
4or 2to advance or
rewind (to skip to an index,
rotate the main command
dial). To switch the current
L (Z/Q) button
selection from start point (w) to end point (x) or vice versa,
press L (Z/Q).
Once you have selected the start point
and/or end point, press 1. All frames
before the selected start point and after
the selected end point will be removed
from the copy.
y
6 Save the copy.
Highlight one of the
following and press J:
• Save as new file: Save the
copy to a new file.
• Overwrite existing file: Replace the original movie file with the
edited copy.
• Cancel: Return to Step 5.
• Preview: Preview the copy.
Edited copies are indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. If a copy can not be created
at the current playback position, the current position will be displayed
in red in Step 5 and no copy will be created. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie
y
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 View the movie and
choose a frame.
Play the movie back as
approximate position in the
movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause
the movie at the frame you intend to copy.
2 Display movie edit
options.
y
Press J to display movie
edit options.
J button
3 Choose Save selected
frame.
Highlight Save selected
frame and press J.
4 Create a still copy.
Press 1to create a still copy
of the current frame.
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Save the copy.
Highlight Yes and press J
to create a fine-quality
selected frame. Movie stills
are indicated by a 9 icon in full-frame playback.
y
A Save Selected Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d
Image Recording Options
Image Area
Choose the aspect ratio and angle of view (image area). Thanks to
the camera’s FX format (36.0 × 23.9 mm) image sensor, you can
choose from angles of view as wide as those supported by 35 mm
(135) format film cameras, while automatically cropping pictures
to the DX angle of view when using DX format lenses. See page
444 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored
at different image area settings.
❚❚Auto DX Crop
Choose whether to automatically select a DX
crop when a DX lens is attached.
d
Option
On
Description
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is
attached. If another lens is attached, the crop selected for
Choose image area will be used.
Off
Crop selected for Choose image area is used.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Choose Image Area
Choose the image area used when a non-DX
lens is attached or a DX-lens is attached with
Option
Description
Images are recorded in FX format using the full area
of the image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm), producing an
angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a
35 mm format camera.
FX (36×24)
1.0×
(FX format)
c
Z
A 29.9 × 19.9 mm area at the center of the image
1.2× (30×20) sensor is used to record photographs. To calculate
1.2×
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.2.
An area at the center of the image sensor
23.4 × 15.5 mm is used to record pictures in DX
format. To calculate the approximate focal length of
the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4
(29.9 × 23.9 mm).
DX (24×16)
1.5×
(DX format)
d
a
b
5 : 4 (30×24)
FX format
DX format (24×16)
image circle
DX format
5 : 4
1.2×
FX format (36×24)
image circle
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Image Area
The selected option is shown in the information
display.
A DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If Auto DX
crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is selected
for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may
be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the
images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the
edges of the picture are blacked out.
A The Viewfinder Display
The 1.2 ×, DX format, and 5 : 4 crops are shown below.
d
1.2×
DX format
5 : 4
A See Also
See page 71 for information on the crops available in movie live view.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the
shooting menu or by pressing a control and rotating a command
dial.
❚❚The Image Area Menu
1 Select Image area in
G button
the shooting menu.
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Image
area in the shooting
2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight Auto DX crop or
Choose image area and
press 2.
d
3 Adjust settings.
Choose an option and
press J. The selected crop
is displayed in the
J button
D Auto DX Crop
when a DX lens is attached and Auto DX crop is on.
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Camera Controls
1 Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Select Choose image area as the “press + command dials”
option for a camera control in the Custom Settings menu
the center of the sub-selector (Custom Setting f6, Assign sub-
2 Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be
selected by pressing the
selected control and rotating
the main or sub-command
dial until the desired crop is
displayed in the viewfinder
d
Fn button
Main
command dial
The option currently selected
for image area can be viewed by
pressing the control to display the image
area in the top control panel or
information display. FX format is
displayed as “36 × 24”, 1.2 × as “30 × 20”,
DX format as “24 × 16”, and 5 : 4 as
“30 × 24”.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Quality
The D4 supports the following image quality options. See page
444 for information on the number of pictures that can be stored
at different image quality and size settings.
Option
File type
Description
RAW data from the image sensor are saved
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic
Format (NEF). Settings such as white balance
and contrast can be adjusted after shooting.
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is
NEF (RAW)
NEF
TIFF
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine
(RGB) supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
d
JPEG normal JPEG
JPEG basic
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+
NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
JPEG normal JPEG and one normal-quality JPEG image.
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image quality is set by pressing
the T button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
rear control panel.
T button
Main
command dial
Rear control panel
A NEF (RAW) Images
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software such
the supplied ViewNX 2 installer CD). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images
can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
d
A NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the
Secondary slot function > RAW primary, JPEG secondary option,
deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF (RAW) image.
A The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the
Image quality option in the shooting menu
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following options can be
accessed from the shooting
menu. Press the G button to
display the menus, highlight
the desired option and press 2.
G button
❚❚JPEG Compression
Choose the type of compression for JPEG images.
Option
Description
Images are compressed to produce relatively
uniform file size.
Size priority
O
P
Optimal
quality
Optimal image quality. File size varies with scene
recorded.
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > Type
d Choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
with no effect on image quality.
Lossless
compressed
N
NEF images are compressed using a non-
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
35–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
O Compressed
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
❚❚NEF (RAW) Recording > NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images.
Option
Description
q 12-bit NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits,
r 14-bit producing files larger than those with a bit depth of
12 bits but increasing the color data recorded.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Size
Imagesizeismeasuredinpixels. Choosefrom# Large,$ Medium,
or % Small (note that image size varies depending on the option
Image area
Option Size (pixels)
Large 4,928 × 3,280
Medium 3,696 × 2,456
Print size (cm/in.) *
41.7 × 27.8/16.4 × 10.9
31.3 × 20.8/12.3 × 8.2
20.9 × 13.9/ 8.2 × 5.5
34.7 × 23.0/13.7 × 9.1
26.0 × 17.3/10.2 × 6.8
17.3 × 11.5/ 6.8 × 4.5
27.1 × 18.0/10.7 × 7.1
20.3 × 13.5/ 8.0 × 5.3
13.5 × 9.0/ 5.3 × 3.5
34.7 × 27.8/13.7 × 10.9
26.0 × 20.8/10.2 × 8.2
17.3 × 13.9/ 6.8 × 5.5
FX (36×24) 1.0×
(FX format)
Small
Large
2,464 × 1,640
4,096 × 2,720
1.2× (30×20)
1.2×
Medium 3,072 × 2,040
Small
Large
2,048 × 1,360
3,200 × 2,128
DX (24×16) 1.5×
(DX format)
Medium 2,400 × 1,592
Small
Large
1,600 × 1,064
4,096 × 3,280
d
5 : 4 (30×24)
Medium 3,072 × 2,456
Small 2,048 × 1,640
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch
(dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Image size can be set by pressing
the T button and rotating the
sub-command dial until the
desired option is displayed in the
rear control panel.
T button Sub-command
dial
Rear control panel
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of
NEF (RAW) images. When opened in software such as ViewNX 2
(supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately), NEF (RAW) images
have the dimensions given for large (#-size) images in the table on the
previous page.
A The Image Size Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image
d
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot selection
item in the shooting menu. Select XQD card slot to designate the
card in the XQD card slot as the primary card, CF card slot to
choose the CompactFlash card. The roles played by the primary
and secondary cards can be chosen using the Secondary slot
function option in the shooting menu. Choose from Overflow
(the secondary card is used only when the primary card is full),
Backup (each picture is recorded to both the primary and
secondary card), and RAW primary, JPEG secondary (as for
Backup, except that the NEF/RAW copies of photos recorded at
settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are recorded only to the primary card
and the JPEG copies only to the secondary card).
d
D “Backup” and “RAW Primary, JPEG Secondary”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with
the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled when
recorded to the memory card in the primary slot.
A Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the Movie settings > Destination
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Focus
This section describes the options that control how your camera
focuses when photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus
or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after
Autofocus
To use autofocus, rotate the focus-
Focus-mode selector
mode selector to AF.
N
Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Mode
Description
Single-servo autofocus: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. At default settings,
shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is
AF-S
Continuous-servo autofocus: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary.
At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject
AF-C
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autofocus mode can
be selected by
pressing the AF-mode
button and rotating
the main command
dial until the desired
setting is displayed in
the viewfinder and
top control panel.
AF-mode button
Top control panel
Main command dial
Viewfinder
N
A See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo autofocus,
information on using release priority in single-servo autofocus, see
preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter-release button
page 52 for information on the autofocus options available in live view
or during movie recording.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The B Buttons
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing
either of the B buttons has the same effect as
pressing the shutter-release button halfway
(note that the B button for vertical shooting
can only be used when the vertical shooting
viewfinder photography, focus will remain
locked after the B button is released,
although the in-focus indicator (I) will not be
displayed. Focus can be unlocked by pressing
the B button again.
B button
B button for
vertical shooting
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate predictive
focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or either of the B
buttons is pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while
attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is
released.
N
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point
only. Use with stationary subjects.
In AF-C focus mode, the camera will focus based on information
from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the
selected point. The number of focus points varies with the mode
selected:
- 9-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to compose
the photograph or when photographing subjects that are
moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
- 21-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
- 51-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the
viewfinder (e.g., birds).
N
AF-C focus mode, the camera will track subjects that leave the
selected focus point and select new focus points as required.
Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving
erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject
leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release
button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the focus
point; if a face is detected, the camera will
give priority to the portrait subject. The
active focus points are highlighted briefly
after the camera focuses; in AF-C mode, the
main focus point remains highlighted after
the other focus points have turned off.
AF-area mode can be
selected by pressing
the AF-mode button
and rotating the sub-
command dial until
the desired setting is
AF-mode button
Sub-command dial
displayed in the
viewfinder and top
control panel.
N
Top control panel
Viewfinder
A 3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the top control panel and viewfinder.
Top control
Top control
AF-area mode
panel Viewfinder
AF-area mode
51-point
panel Viewfinder
Single-point
AF
dynamic-area
AF *
9-point
dynamic-area
AF *
3D-tracking
21-point
dynamic-area
AF *
Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.
A Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A See Also
N
For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before
refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera, see Custom
information on the autofocus options available in live view or during
movie recording.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Point Selection
The camera offers a choice of 51 focus points that can be used to
compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame.
1 Rotate the focus selector
lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to
be used to select the focus
point.
Focus selector lock
2 Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point in the
viewfinder while the exposure
meters are on. The center
focus point can be selected by
pressing the center of the multi
selector.
N
The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the
multi selector is pressed.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The Sub-selector
Sub-selector
The sub-selector can be used in place
of the multi selector to select the
focus point. Press the center of the
put your fingers or fingernails in your
eye when using the sub-selector.
Center of sub-selector
A Portrait (Tall-Orientation) Photographs
When framing shots in portrait (“tall”) orientation, use the multi selector
for vertical shooting to select the focus point. For more information, see
A Using the Sub-selector and Multi Selector
for Vertical Shooting
Use as shown at right. Pressing the sides may not
have the desired effect.
N
A Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual
focus-point selection is not available.
A See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
on setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting
the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi
information on choosing separate focus points for vertical and
horizontal orientations, see Custom Setting a10 (Store points by
selector center button, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector center
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition. If the camera is unable to focus
the photograph after focusing on another object at the same
distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective
when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for AF-area
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to initiate focus. Check
that the in-focus indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder.
N
2 Lock focus.
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the center of
the sub-selector (w) to lock
both focus and exposure (an
AE-L icon will be displayed in
the viewfinder). Focus will
remain locked while the center
of the sub-selector is pressed,
even if you later remove your
finger from the shutter-release
button.
Shutter-release button
Center of sub-selector
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks automatically when the in-focus
indicator appears, and remain locked until you remove your
finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be
locked by pressing the center of the sub-selector (see above).
3 Recompose the photograph
and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (AF-S) or keep the center of the sub-selector pressed,
allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the
same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject
while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the
new distance.
N
A See Also
information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
on choosing the role played by the center of the sub-selector.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus
same distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the
background.
The focus point contains objects at different distances
from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
N
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the
subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus
(non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce
• AF-S lenses: Set the lens focus mode switch to M.
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus mode
switch (if present) and camera
focus-mode selector to M.
Focus-mode selector
D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens
focus mode switch set to M and
the camera focus-mode selector
set to AF. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the
camera or lens.
• Manual focus lenses: Set the camera focus-mode selector to M.
N
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring
until the image displayed on the clear matte
field in the viewfinder is in focus.
Photographs can be taken at any time, even
when the image is not in focus.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Electronic Rangefinder
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can
be used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of the
51 focus points). After positioning the
subject in the selected focus point, press
the shutter-release button halfway and
rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus
indicator (I) is displayed. Note that with
focus indicator may sometimes be
displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before
shooting.
N
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body. The distance between
the lens mounting flange and the focal
plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5 mm
Focal plane mark
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
k
Release Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the release
mode dial lock release and turn the release
mode dial to the desired setting.
Mode
S
Description
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-
release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records photographs at the frame rate selected for Custom
CL
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera records photographs at the frame rate selected for Custom
k
CH
Quiet shutter-release: As for single-frame except that noise is reduced by
disabling beeps and minimizing sound produced when mirror drops
back into place. Beep does not sound when camera focuses
and mirror does not drop back into place until shutter-release button
is returned to halfway position after shooting, allowing you to delay
noise made by mirror. Mirror is quieter than in single-frame mode.
Self-timer: Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring
J
E
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
MUP or close-up photography or in other situations in which the slightest
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Continuous Release Modes
In continuous low speed mode, the camera records photographs
at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed,
mode, the maximum frame rate can be chosen from 10 and 11 fps
high-speed (note that at 11 fps, focus will be fixed at the value for
the first shot in each burst and that, when the subject is poorly lit,
exposure will also be fixed at the value for the first shot).
The foregoing frame rates assume continuous-servo AF, manual or
shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster,
and other settings at default values. Frame rates may drop at
extremely small apertures (high f-numbers) or slow shutter
speeds, when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) or
low.
k
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can
be stored in the memory buffer at current
settings is shown in the exposure-count
displays in the viewfinder and top control
panel while the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. The illustration at right
shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 79
pictures.
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Up to 200 photographs can be taken in succession;
note, however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full (t00).
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access
lamp will light. Depending on shooting conditions and memory card
performance, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.
Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source
until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched off while
data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all images in
the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images
remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images
transferred to the memory card.
k
A See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs
that can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d3 (Max.
pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see page 444.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-
portraits.
1 Mount the camera on a tripod.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable,
level surface.
2 Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to E.
Release mode dial
3 Frame the photograph and focus.
k
photographs can only be taken if the
in-focus (I) indicator appears in the viewfinder.
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder
eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering
via the viewfinder from appearing in
photographs or interfering with exposure.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-timer
lamp will start to flash. Two seconds before the photograph is
taken, the self-timer lamp will stop flashing. The shutter will
be released about ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
k
A A
Time (bulb) exposures can not be recorded using the self-timer. A fixed
shutter speed will be used if a speed of A is selected in exposure
mode h.
A See Also
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number
of shots taken, and the interval between shots, see Custom Setting c3
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is
recommended.
1 Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to MUP.
Release mode dial
2 Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.
D Mirror Up
k
While the mirror is raised, photos can not be framed in the
viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
3 Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture. To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use
shooting ends.
A Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
ISO Sensitivity
Manual Adjustment
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. Choose
from settings that range from ISO 100 and ISO 12800 in steps
equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO
100 and 0.3 to 4 EV above ISO 12800 are also available for special
situations. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to
make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller
apertures.
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted
by pressing the S button and
rotating the main command
dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panels
or viewfinder.
S button
Main command
dial
S
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO
sensitivity settings option in the shooting
A Hi 0.3–Hi 4
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 4 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–4 EV
over ISO 12800 (ISO16000–204800 equivalent). Pictures taken at these
settings are more likely to be subject to noise (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines).
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities
0.3–1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 80–50 equivalent). Use for larger apertures
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 100 or above are recommended.
A See Also
For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see Custom
using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at
high ISO sensitivities, see page 302.
S
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved
at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is adjusted
appropriately when the flash is used).
1 Select Auto ISO
G button
sensitivity control for
ISO sensitivity settings
in the shooting menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select ISO
sensitivity settings in the shooting menu, highlight Auto ISO
sensitivity control, and press 2.
2 Select On.
Highlight On and press J
(if Off is selected, ISO
sensitivity will remain fixed
at the value selected by the
user).
S
J button
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto
ISO sensitivity can be selected
using Maximum sensitivity
(the minimum value for auto
ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100; note that if the
value selected for Maximum sensitivity is lower than the
value currently selected for ISO sensitivity, the value selected
for Maximum sensitivity will be used). In exposure modes e
and g, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would
result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter
speed (1/4000–1 s, or Auto; in modes f and h, ISO sensitivity
will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed
selected by the user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses;
equivalent to 1/30 s when a non-CPU lens is used) is selected,
the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on
the focal length of the lens (auto shutter-speed selection can
be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto and pressing 2; for
example, even faster values than those usually selected
automatically by the camera can be used with telephoto
lenses to reduce blur). Shutter speeds slower than the
minimum value may be used if optimum exposure can not be
achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum
sensitivity. Press J to exit when settings are complete.
S
When On is selected, the viewfinder and
rear control panel show Z. When
sensitivity is altered from the value selected
by the user, these indicators flash and the
altered value is shown in the viewfinder and rear control panel.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or
off by pressing the S button and rotating the
sub-command dial. The rear control panel
displays an Z icon when auto ISO
sensitivity control is on and Y when it is off.
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at
higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu
for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
selecting slow shutter speeds.
S
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
Exposure
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option
Description
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera meters
a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone
distribution, color, composition, and, with type G or D lenses
other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III, which
does not include 3D distance information). With non-CPU lenses,
camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum
aperture are specified using Non-CPU lens data option in setup
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be
if non-CPU lens is attached, area is 12 mm in diameter). Classic
meter for portraits; recommended when using filters with an
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×. *
L
M
N
Z
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current focus
point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if non-CPU
lens is used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center
focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even
when background is much brighter or darker. *
* For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To choose a metering
option, press the Y
button and rotate the
main command dial
until the desired
setting is displayed in
the viewfinder and
top control panel.
Y button Main command dial
Top control panel
Viewfinder
Z
A See Also
For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure
for each metering method, see Custom Setting b6 (Fine-tune optimal
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Mode
To determine how the
camera sets shutter speed
and aperture when
I (Q) button
adjusting exposure, press
the I (Q) button and
rotate the main command
dial until the desired option
appears in the top control
panel.
Main command dial
A Lens Types
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G
lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure mode g (aperture-priority
auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is
exposure mode indicator (e or f) will flash in the top control panel and
g will be displayed in the viewfinder.
Z
A Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (modes e and f) or the value chosen by
the user (modes g and h), allowing depth of field
to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Pv button
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether optional flash units such as the SB-910,
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.
A Flexible Program
In exposure mode e, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are on (“flexible program”).
Rotate the dial to the right for large apertures
(low f-numbers) that blur background details or
fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Rotate
the dial to the left for small apertures (high f-
numbers) that increase depth of field or slow
shutter speeds that blur motion. All
Main command dial
Z
combinations produce the same exposure.
While flexible program is in effect, an asterisk
(“U”) appears in the top control panel. To
restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the dial until
the asterisk is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the
camera off.
A See Also
information on activating the exposure meters, see “The Standby
Timer” on page 45.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure. Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by
blurring moving objects, fast shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)
To choose a shutter speed,
rotate the main command
dial while the exposure
meters are on. Shutter speed
can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and
1/8,000 s. Shutter speed can be
locked at the selected setting
Main command dial
Z
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the
optimal exposure. Large apertures (low f-numbers) increase flash
and in front of the main subject. Small apertures (high f-numbers)
increase depth of field, bringing out details in the background and
foreground. Short field depths are generally used in portraits to
blur background details, long field depths in landscape
photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus.
Small aperture (f/36)
Large aperture (f/2.8)
To choose an aperture
between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens,
rotate the sub-command dial
while the exposure meters are
on. Aperture can be locked at
Z
Sub-command dial
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture.
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item
attached, the current f-number will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops
(F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must
be read from the lens aperture ring.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
h: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the shutter can be held open
can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values
for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to check exposure.
Sub-command dial
Aperture
Shutter
speed
Z
Main command dial
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.
A Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV
exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of
the exposure metering system are exceeded during viewfinder
photography or live view, the exposure indicators and the shutter speed
(modes e and g) and/or aperture (modes e and f) displays will flash.
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Optimal exposure
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 3 EV
Top control
panel
Viewfinder
A See Also
For information reversing the exposure indicators so that negative
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see
Z
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Long Time-Exposures
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or
recommended to prevent blur.
Shutter speed: 35 s; aperture: f/25
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to
the camera.
A Long Time-Exposures
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light entering via
the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering
EN-EL18 battery or an optional EH-6b AC adapter and EP-6 power
connector to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note
that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may
be present in long exposures; before shooting, choose On for the
Z
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select exposure
I (Q) button
mode h.
Press the I (Q)
button and rotate the
main command dial
until h is displayed in
the top control panel.
Main command dial
3 Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on, rotate
the main command dial until “A”
appears in the shutter-speed displays.
The exposure indicators do not appear when “A“ is
selected.
4 Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
Z
5 Release the shutter-release button.
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record
the photograph.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock
Shutter speed lock is available in shutter-priority auto and manual
exposure modes, aperture lock in aperture-priority auto and
manual exposure modes. Shutter speed and aperture lock are not
available in programmed auto exposure mode.
1 Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera
control.
Select Shutter spd & aperture lock as the “Press + command
speed and aperture lock can be assigned to the Fn button
center of the sub-selector (Custom Setting f6, Assign sub-
2 Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.
Shutter speed (exposure modes f and h): Press the selected control
and rotate the main command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and top control panel.
Z
Fn button
Main command dial
To unlock shutter speed, press the control and rotate the main
command dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aperture (exposure modes g and h): Press the selected control and
rotate the sub-command dial until F icons appear in the
viewfinder and the top control panel.
Fn button
Sub-command dial
To unlock aperture, press the control and rotate the sub-
command dial until the F icons disappear from the displays.
Z
A See Also
shutter speed and/or aperture locked at the selected values.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering to meter exposure.
Note that matrix metering will not produce the desired results.
1 Lock exposure.
Shutter-release
button
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutter-
release button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus
point, press the center of the sub-
selector to lock exposure (if you are
using autofocus, confirm that the I in-
Center of sub-
selector
focus indicator appears in the
viewfinder).
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
Z
2 Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the center of the sub-
selector pressed, recompose
the photograph and shoot.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
4-mm (0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-
weighted metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
Setting
e
f
g
Shutter speed
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control
panel. Note that the metering method can not be changed while
exposure lock is in effect.
A See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
halfway. For information on changing the role of the center of the sub-
Z
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is
most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering
+5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV. In general, positive
values make the subject brighter while negative values make it
darker.
–1 EV
No exposure
+1 EV
compensation
To choose a value for
exposure compensation,
press the E button and
rotate the main
E button
command dial until the
desired value is
Z
displayed in the
viewfinder or top control
panel.
Main command dial
0 EV
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
(E button pressed)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At values other than 0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will
flash (exposure modes e, f, and g only)
and a E icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder and top control panel after
you release the E button. The current
value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the
exposure indicator by pressing the E button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to 0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when
the camera is turned off.
A Exposure Mode h
In exposure mode h, exposure compensation affects only the exposure
indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
Z
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level
and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the
background only.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
compensation without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4
automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which it is
difficult to set exposure, flash level (i-TTL and, where supported,
Active D-Lighting, or white balance and there is not time to check
results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with
different settings for the same subject.
❚❚Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:
0 EV
–1 EV
+1 EV
Z
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Select flash or exposure
bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 (Auto
G button
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
Custom Setting e6 (Auto
bracketing set) in the
Custom Settings menu,
highlight an option, and
press J. Choose AE &
flash to vary both
J button
exposure and flash level, AE only to vary only exposure, or
Flash only to vary only flash level.
Z
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
Top control panel
D button
Main command
dial
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and
flash bracketing indicator will be displayed in the
viewfinder and top control panel.
Z
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment
Top control panel
D button
Sub-command
dial
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.
Control panel display
No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
0/+0.3/+0.7
0/–0.7/–0.3
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
Z
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
7
9
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed,
choosing the role of the D button, see Custom Setting f9 (Assign BKT
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel. A
segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
❚❚Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed. The program
last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset
restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Z
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. If 1 is selected for Custom Setting c3
will take one shot each time the shutter-release button is pressed, but if
the Number of shots is 2 or more, the camera will take all the shots in
the sequence in a single burst at the interval selected for Custom
Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one
shot will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for
modes e, f, and g and no flash is attached, the camera will
automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits
of the camera exposure system are exceeded. Custom Setting e7 (Auto
performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure mode.
Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with
shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.
Z
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with
a different white balance. For more information on white balance,
see page 153.
1 Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
Z
D button
Main command
dial
Top control panel
WB bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a W icon and WB
bracketing indicator will appear in the top control
panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
D button
Sub-command Top control panel
dial
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber
listed below.
No. of White balance
Control panel display
shots increment
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
1
1 B
1 A
1 B
1 A
1 B / 0 / 2 B
1 A / 2 A / 0
0 / 1 B
0 / 1 A
Z
1 A, 1 B
1 A, 1 B
0 / 1 A / 1 B
0 / 2 A / 1 A / 1 B / 2 B
0 / 3 A / 2 A / 1 A /
1 B / 2 B / 3 B
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/1 A/
1 B / 2 B / 3 B / 4 B
7
9
1 A, 1 B
1 A, 1 B
A See Also
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining,
n and the icon for the affected
card will flash in the top control panel,
a flashing j icon will appear in the
viewfinder as shown at right, and the
shutter release will be disabled.
Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
Z
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.
Z
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the white-balance
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. For
more information on Active D-Lighting, see page 184.
1 Select ADL bracketing.
Choose ADL bracketing for Custom
Setting e6 Auto bracketing set.
2 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the D button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the top control panel.
Number of shots
Top control panel
D button
Main command
dial
Z
ADL bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a d icon and an ADL bracketing
indicator appear in the top control panel and M will be
displayed in the viewfinder. Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a
selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of
photographs with Active D-Lighting set successively to values
between Off and Normal (three shots), between Off and High
(four shots), or between Off and Extra high 1 or Low and
Extra high 2 (five shots). If you choose more than two shots,
proceed to Step 4.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the D button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.
D button
Sub-command
dial
Active D-Lighting is shown in the top control panel.
Control panel display
ADL
Control panel display
ADL
Y
P
Auto
High
R
Z
Low
Extra high 1
Z
Q
3
Normal
Extra high 2
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot according
to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in
effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the
top control panel. A segment will disappear from the
indicator after each shot.
Z
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the D button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
A ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes, shooting
will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing
program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the
shutter-release button is pressed. If 1 is selected for Custom Setting c3
will take one shot each time the shutter-release button is pressed, but if
the Number of shots is 2 or more, the camera will take all the shots in
the sequence in a single burst at the interval selected for Custom
Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Interval between shots. In other modes, one
shot will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
Z
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to
make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all
shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the
next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
White Balance
White Balance Options
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most
light sources. If the desired results can not be achieved with auto
white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset
white balance.
Option
vAuto
Normal
Colortemp. *
Description
White balance is adjusted
3,500– automatically. For best results, use type
8,000 K G or D lens. If optional flash fires, results
are adjusted appropriately.
Keep warm lighting
colors
J Incandescent
3,000 K Use under incandescent lighting.
Use with:
I
Fluorescent
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).
Sodium-vapor lamps 2,700 K
Warm-white
3,000 K • Warm-white fluorescent lights.
3,700 K • White fluorescent lights.
fluorescent
White fluorescent
Cool-white
r
4,200 K • Cool-white fluorescent lights.
fluorescent
Day white
fluorescent
5,000 K • Daylight white fluorescent lights.
Daylight fluorescent 6,500 K • Daylight fluorescent lights.
High temp.
mercury-vapor
• High color temperature light sources
(e.g. mercury-vapor lamps).
7,200 K
H Direct sunlight
Flash
5,200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
5,400 K Use with optional flash units.
N
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
G Cloudy
M Shade
Colortemp. *
Description
6,000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies.
8,000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.
2,500– Choose color temperature from list of
K
Choose color temp.
Use subject, light source, or existing
L Preset manual
—
photograph as reference for white
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
White balance can be selected by pressing the U button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
U button
Main command dial
r
A The Shooting Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the
White balance option in the shooting menu
in the White balance menu offers a choice of
Normal and Keep warm lighting colors, which
preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent lighting, while
the I Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from
the bulb types.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large
studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to
Flash and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
A See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
time the shutter is released. White balance will be varied with each
image, “bracketing” the value currently selected for white balance. See
page 145 for more information.
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5,000–5,500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to the
following color temperatures:
• I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2,700 K
• J (incandescent)/
I (warm-white fluorescent.):
3,000 K
• I (white fluorescent): 3,700 K
• I (cool-white fluorescent):
4,200 K
• H (direct sunlight): 5,200 K
• N (flash): 5,400 K
• G (cloudy): 6,000 K
• I (daylight fluorescent): 6,500 K r
• I (high temp. mercury-vapor):
7,200 K
• M (shade): 8,000 K
• I (day white fluorescent):
5,000 K
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the U
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚The White Balance Menu
1 Select a white balance
option in the shooting
menu.
G button
To display the menus, press
the G button. Select
White balance in the
shooting menu, then highlight a white balance option and
press 2. If an option other than Auto, Fluorescent, Choose
color temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to Step 2.
If Auto or Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type
and press 2. For information on fine-tuning preset white
balance, see page 169.
r
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Fine-tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to fine-
tune white balance. White
balance can be fine-tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
the green (G)–magenta (M)
axis. The horizontal (amber-
Coordinates Adjustment
blue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (green-
magenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding
color compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
Amber (A)
Increase magenta
Magenta (M)
Increase blue
Increase amber
3 Press J.
r
Press J to save settings and return to the
shooting menu. If white balance has been
fine-tuned, an asterisk (“U”) will be
displayed in the rear control panel.
J button
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
r
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚The UButton
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the U button can be used to fine-tune white balance
when L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the rear control panel. Rotating the sub-command
dial to the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the
sub-command dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B).
At settings other than 0, an asterisk (“U”) appears in the rear
control panel.
Rear control panel
U button
Sub-command dial
r
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected using the White balance option in
the shooting menu or by using the U button, multi selector, and
sub-command dial.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
❚❚The White Balance Menu
1 Select Choose color
G button
temp.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu.
Highlight Choose color
temp. and press 2.
r
2 Select a value for amber-
blue.
Press 4or 2to highlight digits
and press 1or 3to change.
Value for amber (A)-blue
(B) axis
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select a value for green-
magenta.
Press 4or 2to highlight the G
(green) or M (magenta) axis
and press 1or 3to select a
value.
Value for green (G)-magenta
(M) axis
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes and return to the
shooting menu. If a value other than 0 is
selected for the green (G)–magenta (M)
axis, an asterisk (“U”) will be displayed in
the rear control panel.
J button
r
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚The UButton
The U button can be used to select the color temperature for the
amber (A)–blue (B) axis only. Press the U button and rotate the
sub-command dial until the desired value is displayed in the rear
color temperature directly in increments of 10 K, press the U
button and press 4or 2to highlight a digit and press 1or 3to
change.
U button
Sub-command dial
Rear control panel
r
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to
four values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-4.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
Direct measurement lighting that will be used in final photograph and
Copy from existing
photograph
White balance is copied from photo on memory
r
A White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank.
A Measuring Preset White Balance
Preset manual white balance can not be measured during live view
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Measuring a Value for White Balance
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
U button
Main command dial
3 Select a preset.
r
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-4) is displayed in
the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
U button
Sub-command dial
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the rear control panel starts to flash. A
flashing D will also appear in the top
control panel and viewfinder. The
Top control panel
displays will flash for about six seconds.
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
5 Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera
will measure a value for white balance and store it in the
preset selected in Step 3. No photograph will be recorded;
white balance can be measured accurately even when the
camera is not in focus.
r
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will flash
in the control panels for about six
seconds, while the viewfinder will show
a flashing a.
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure
white balance. A flashing b a will
appear in the control panels and
viewfinder for about six seconds. Press
the shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.
Top control panel
Rear control panel
Viewfinder
r
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2
A Protected Presets
tuned, the comment can not be edited, and 3 will flash in the top
control panel and viewfinder (and L in the rear control panel) if you
attempt to measure a new value.
A Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White balance
option in the shooting menu displays the dialog
shown at right; highlight a preset and press J. If
no value currently exists for the selected preset,
white balance will be set to 5,200 K, the same as
Direct sunlight.
r
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select L (Preset
manual) for White
balance in the
G button
shooting menu.
Press the G button and
select White balance in
the shooting menu. Highlight Preset manual and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi selector.
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
r
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To
view the highlighted image full
frame, press and hold the X
button.
To view images in other locations, press
W and select the desired card and folder
5 Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset.
If the highlighted photograph has a comment
comment for the selected preset.
J button
A Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-1–d-4) and press 2to select another
preset.
r
A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white balance
as described on page 157.
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
and press 2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
3 Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.
4 Edit the comment.
r
Edit the comment as described on page
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Protecting a White Balance Preset
Follow the steps below to protect the selected white balance
preset. Protected presets can not be modified and the Fine-tune
and Edit comment options can not be used.
1 Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
and press 2.
2 Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
3 Select Protect.
Highlight Protect and press 2.
r
4 Select On.
Highlight On and press J
to protect the selected
white balance preset. To
remove protection, select
J button
Off.
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
r
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J
Image Enhancement
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and
software.
Selecting a Picture Control
The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls. Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Description
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Q Standard
R Neutral
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
S Vivid
T Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
J
o Portrait
p Landscape
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
1 Press L (Z/Q).
A list of Picture Controls
will be displayed.
L (Z/Q) button
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired
Picture Control and press
J.
J button
A Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset
Picture Controls. Custom Picture Controls are created through
modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other D4 cameras
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.
J
Picture Control
indicator
A The Shooting Menu
Picture Controls can also be selected using the
Set Picture Control option in the shooting
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls
the user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust,
or make manual adjustments to individual
settings.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Picture Control
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1or 3to highlight the
desired setting and press 4or
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
(Q) button.
J
3 Press J.
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk
(“U”) in the Set Picture Control menu.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Picture Control Settings
Option
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Quick adjust
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
Contrast
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
brightness. Does not affect exposure.
Brightness
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
Saturation
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
Hue
J
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
photographs. Choose from OFF, yellow, orange, red,
Filter
effects
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white), Sepia, Cyanotype (blue-tinted
monochrome), Red, Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue,
Toning
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and
saturation vary with exposure and the position
of the subject in the frame. Use a type G or D
lens for best results. The icons for Picture
Controls that use auto contrast and saturation
are displayed in green in the Picture Control
grid, and lines appear parallel to the axes of the
grid.
A The Picture Control Grid
displays a Picture Control grid showing the
contrast and saturation for the selected Picture
Control in relation to the other Picture Controls
(only contrast is displayed when Monochrome
is selected). Release the W button to return to
the Picture Control menu.
A Previous Settings
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous
value for the setting. Use this as a reference
when adjusting settings.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
J
Option
Description
Y
O
R
G
Yellow
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness of
Orange the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Red
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4or 2to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
A Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as
those on which the custom Picture Control was based.
J
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Select Manage Picture G button
Control in the shooting
menu.
To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
Manage Picture Control
in the shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press
2.
3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to Step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
J
modification.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.
abandon any changes and start over from
default settings, press the O (Q) button.
Press J when settings are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
6 Name the Picture
Keyboard
area
Control.
The text-entry dialog shown
at right will be displayed. By
default, new Picture
Name area
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control; to
use the default name, proceed to Step 7. To move the cursor
in the name area, hold the W button and press 4or 2. To
enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the multi
selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard
area and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O (Q)
button.
J
Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen
characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be
deleted.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes
and exit. The new Picture
Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
J button
A Manage Picture Control > Rename
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any
time using the Rename option in the Manage
Picture Control menu.
A Manage Picture Control > Delete
The Delete option in the Manage Picture
Control menu can be used to delete selected
custom Picture Controls when they are no
longer needed.
J
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The original preset Picture Control on which the
custom Picture Control is based is indicated by
an icon in the top right corner of the edit
display.
Original Picture
Control icon
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in other D4 cameras and compatible
software and then deleted when no longer needed (if two
memory cards are inserted, the card in the primary slot will be
To copy custom Picture Controls to
or from the memory card, or to
delete custom Picture Controls
from the memory card, highlight
Load/Save in the Manage Picture
Control menu and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
• Copy to camera: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory
card to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera
and name them as desired.
• Delete from card: Delete
selected custom Picture
Controls from the memory
card. The confirmation
dialog shown at right will be
displayed before a Picture
J
J button
Control is deleted; to delete
the selected Picture Control, highlight Yes and press J.
• Copy to card: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from
the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the
memory card.
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The preset Picture Controls supplied with the
deleted.
J
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preserving Detail in Highlights
and Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used with matrix
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: YAuto
J
D “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after
shooting.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use Active D-Lighting:
1 Select Active
D-Lighting in the
shooting menu.
G button
To display the menus, press
the G button. Highlight
Active D-Lighting in the
shooting menu and press
2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight the desired
option and press J. If
YAuto is selected, the
camera will automatically
adjust Active D-Lighting
according to shooting
J button
conditions (in exposure mode h, however, YAuto is
equivalent to Q Normal).
J
D Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting can not be used with movies. Noise (randomly-
spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in photographs taken
with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be visible with some
subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3
or above.
A See Also
When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e6 (Auto
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when
and a non-CPU lens, an exposure differential of Auto is equivalent
to about 2 EV). It can not be used to record NEF (RAW) images.
of A is not available.
+
First exposure
(darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
Combined HDR
image
1 Select HDR (high
G button
dynamic range).
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight HDR (high
dynamic range) in the
shooting menu and press 2.
J
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and
press 2.
Highlight one of the
following and press J.
• To take a series of HDR
photographs, select
0 On (series). HDR
shooting will continue
until you select Off for
HDR mode.
J button
• To take one HDR photograph, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a y icon will be displayed in
the top control panel.
J
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Choose the exposure
differential.
To choose the difference in
exposure between the two
shots, highlight Exposure
differential and press 2.
The options shown at right
will be displayed. Highlight
an option and press J.
Choose higher values for
high-contrast subjects, but
note that choosing a value
higher than required may not produce the desired results; if
Auto is selected, the camera will automatically adjust
exposure to suit the scene.
4 Choose the amount of
smoothing.
To choose how much the
boundaries between the
two images are smoothed,
highlight Smoothing and press 2.
J
The options shown at right
will be displayed. Highlight
an option and press J.
Higher values produce a
smoother composite
image. Uneven shading
may be visible with some subjects.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures when
the shutter-release button is pressed all
the way down. “l y” will be displayed
in the top control panel and l u in
the viewfinder while the images are
combined; no photographs can be taken
until recording is complete. Regardless of
the option currently selected for release
mode, only one photograph will be taken
Top control panel
Viewfinder
each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The y
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.
J
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image may be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use of
a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark objects;
this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of smoothing.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The D Button
If HDR (high dynamic range) is selected for
you can select the HDR mode by pressing the
D button and rotating the main command
dial and the exposure differential by pressing
the D button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and exposure differential are
shown in the top control panel: y and R
appear when On (series) is selected and y
when On (single photo) is selected; no icon appears when HDR is off.
A Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot). Ending HDR photography ends
interval timer shooting.
A Shooting Menu Banks
switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure
disabled if you switch to a bank in which an NEF (RAW) option is
selected for image quality.
J
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
l
Flash Photography
Using a Flash
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) and
can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. Optional flash units
can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described
below. The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash
units with a locking pin.
1 Remove the accessory shoe cover.
2 Mount the flash unit on the
accessory shoe.
See the manual provided with the flash
unit for details.
l
A The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect another
flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear-
curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit
mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography.
❚❚CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units:
• The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200:
Flash unit
Feature
Guide
No. 4
SB-910 1 SB-900 1 SB-800 SB-700 1 SB-600 SB-400 2 SB-R200 3
ISO 100 34/111 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 10/33
ISO 200 48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 14/46
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when v or N
(flash) is selected for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the
filter and adjust white balance appropriately.
2 Wireless flash control is not available with the SB-400.
3 Controlled remotely with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit
or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
4 m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom
head position; SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.
• SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLS-
compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash
units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped
with a flash.
l
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide
Number by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide
Number of 38 m or 125 ft. (35mm zoom head position); its range at an
aperture of f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet,
125÷5.6=approximately 23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO
sensitivity, multiply the Guide Number by the square root of two
(approximately 1.4).
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
Flash unit
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Master/commander Remote
SB-910
SB-900
SB-910
SB-900
SB-910
SB-900 SB-700
Flash mode/feature
SB-800 SB-700 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SB-700 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
i-TTL balanced fill-
i-TTL flash for digital
SLR
2
3
2
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
4
4
5
5
5
AA
A
Auto aperture
Non-TTL auto
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
5
5
—
Distance-priority
manual
GN
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
M
Manual
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
RPT Repeating flash
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7
FV lock
AF-assist for multi-area
AF 8
Flash Color Information
Communication
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
Y
Red-eye reduction
Power zoom
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units. The SU-800 itself
is not equipped with a flash.
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected
with flash unit.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
4 Selected with flash unit.
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit.
6 Can be selected with camera.
l
8 CPU lens required.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Auto Aperture/Non-TTL Auto
Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the
aperture (AA) when a non-CPU lens is attached automatically selects
non-TTL auto (A).
A Modeling Illumination
CLS-compatible flash units such as the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,
and SB-600 emit a modeling flash when the camera Pv button is
pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to
preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units.
Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom Setting e5
A Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes.
Flash unit SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-30,SB-27 1,
SB-22S, SB-22, SB-23,SB-29 2,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX SB-16B, SB-15
SB-20,
SB-21B 2,
SB-29S 2
—
Flash mode
A
M
Non-TTL auto
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
Manual
✔
G
Repeating flash
REAR3 Rear-curtain sync
—
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S
Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
l
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D4 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator flashes for
about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at
full power and the photograph may be underexposed.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
l
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye
reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800
provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist
illumination is available with
17–135 mm AF lenses, however,
17–19 mm 20–105 mm 106–135 mm
autofocus is available only with
the focus points shown at right.
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist
illumination is available with
24–34 mm 35–49 mm 50–105 mm
24–105 mm AF lenses, however,
autofocus is available only with
the focus points shown at right.
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is
available with 24–135 mm AF
24–27 mm 28–135 mm
lenses, however, autofocus is
available only with the focus
points shown at right.
In exposure mode e, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
100
200
400
800
1600
3200
6400
12800
4
4.8
5.6
6.7
8
9.5
11
13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
l
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash
units as follows:
Flash sync
i-TTL
Auto aperture (AA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority manual
(GN)
Manual
—
Repeating flash
Advanced wireless
lighting
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a
Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
l
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly invisible
preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
RGB sensor with approximately 91K (91,000) pixels and are analyzed in
combination with range information from matrix metering system to
adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and
ambient background lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data
spot metering is used.
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.
l
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values between
1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP High-Speed
Front-
curtain sync
Choose this mode (available with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 only) to reduce “red-eye” effect
sometimes caused by flash. Not recommended with
moving subjects or in other situations in which quick
shutter response is required. Do not move camera during
shooting.
Red-eye
reduction
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Available only with SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600,
and SB-400 in programmed auto and aperture-priority
auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Red-eye
reduction
with slow
sync
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s to
capture both subject and background at night or under
dim light. This mode is only available in programmed auto
and aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod
is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
shake.
Slow sync
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash
fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create effect of a
stream of light behind moving objects. In programmed
auto and aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is
used to capture both subject and background. Use of
tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
l
Rear-curtain
sync
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Choosing a Flash Mode
To choose the flash mode, press
the M button and rotate the main
command dial until the desired
flash mode is selected in the top
control panel:
M button
Main command
dial
Red-eye reduction with
slow sync 1, 2
Front-curtain sync
Red-eye reduction 1
Rear-curtain sync 4
Slow sync 3
1 Y icon flashes if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.
2 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes e
and g. In modes f and h, red-eye reduction with slow sync becomes
red-eye reduction.
3 Available only in exposure modes e and g. In modes f and h, slow sync
becomes front-curtain sync.
l
4 In exposure modes e and g, flash-sync mode will be set to slow
rear-curtain sync when the M button is released.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Studio Flash Systems
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the
correct synchronization can not be obtained.
A Shutter Speed and Aperture
Shutter speed and aperture can be set as follows when an optional flash
unit is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
Set automatically by camera
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Aperture
See page
e
Set automatically
by camera
f
g
h
Value selected
by user 3
Value selected by user
(1/250 s–30 s, A) 2
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2 Speeds as fast as 1/8,000 s are available with optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800,
SB-700, and SB-600 flash units when 1/250 s (Auto FP) is selected for
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. When setting aperture
in exposure modes g and h, consult the table of flash ranges provided with
optional flash unit.
A See Also
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2
l
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation can be used with i-TTL or AA flash control
(available with compatible flash units only) to alter flash output by
from –3EV to +1EV in increments of 1/3EV, changing the
brightness of the main subject relative to the background. Flash
output can be increased to make the main subject appear
brighter, or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections.
In general, choose positive values to make the main subject
brighter, negative values to make it darker.
To choose a value for flash
compensation, press the M button
and rotate the sub-command dial
until the desired value is
displayed in the top control panel.
M button
Sub-command
dial
0 EV
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
l
(M button pressed)
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At values other than 0.0, a Y icon will be displayed in the top
control panel and E will be displayed in the viewfinder after you
release the M button. The current value for flash compensation can
be confirmed by pressing the M button.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to 0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
A Optional Flash Units
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 also allow flash
compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit; the value
selected with the flash unit is added to the value selected with the
camera.
l
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
compensation is applied in addition to exposure compensation when
the flash is used, see Custom Setting e4 (Exposure comp. for flash,
series of shots, see page 139.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f3
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
accessory shoe.
3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL, monitor
pre-flash AA, or monitor pre-flash A. See the Speedlight
instruction manual for details.
l
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The
flash will emit a monitor preflash to
determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash output will be locked at this level
and FV lock icons (P and e) will
appear in the top control panel and
viewfinder.
Fn button
6 Recompose the photograph.
l
7 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock
icons (P and e) are no longer displayed in the top control
panel and viewfinder.
A Metering
The metering areas for FV lock are as follows:
Flash unit
Flash mode
i-TTL
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Stand-alone flash unit
AA
l
i-TTL
AA
A (master
flash)
Entire frame
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
A See Also
For information on using the Pv button or center of the sub-selector for
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
t
Other Shooting Options
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
The camera settings listed below can be
restored to default values by holding the S
and U buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these buttons are marked
by a green dot). The control panels turn off
briefly while settings are reset.
S
button
U
button
t
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Settings Accessible from the Shooting Menu 1
Option
Image quality
Image size
White balance
Fine-tuning
Picture Control
settings 2
Default
JPEG normal
Large
Auto > Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Option
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO
sensitivity control
Multiple exposure
Interval timer
shooting
Default
100
Off
Off 4
Off 5
Unmodified
Off 3
Live view
photography
HDR (high
dynamic range)
Quiet
1
With the exception of multiple exposure and interval timer settings, only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option
2 Current Picture Control only.
3 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.
4 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple
exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. Gain and
number of shots are not reset.
5 If interval timer shooting is currently in progress, shooting will end. Starting
time, shooting interval, and number of intervals and shots are not reset.
t
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Other Settings
Option
Default
Center
Programmed
auto
Option
Live view
monitor hue
Metering
Bracketing
Default
Focus point 1
--
Exposure mode
Matrix metering
Off 2
Front-curtain
sync
Flexible program
Exposure
compensation
Off
Off
Flash mode
AE lock hold
Off
Off
Off
Flash
compensation
FV lock
Exposure delay
mode
Off
Off
Aperture lock
Shutter-speed lock
Autofocus mode
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
AF-S
Off 3
Single-point AF
Live view/movie Normal-area AF
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is
selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
3 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings
unaffected.
t
A See Also
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can make use of RAW
data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably
superior to those in software-generated photographic overlays.
❚❚Creating a Multiple Exposure
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Exit live view
before proceeding. Note that at default settings, shooting will end
and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no
operations are performed for 30 s.
A Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, extend the meter-
maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer than the option
selected for Custom Setting c2. If no operations are performed for 30 s
after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations,
shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the
exposures that have been recorded to that point.
1 Select Multiple
exposure in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Multiple
t
exposure in the shooting menu and press 2.
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a mode.
Highlight Multiple exposure
mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the
following and press J:
• To take a series of multiple
exposures, select 0 On
(series). Multiple
exposure shooting will
continue until you select
J button
Off for Multiple exposure mode.
• To take one multiple exposure, select On (single photo). Normal
shooting will resume automatically after you have created a
single multiple exposure.
• To exit without creating additional multiple exposures, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a n icon will be displayed in
the top control panel.
t
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Choose the number of
shots.
Highlight Number of shots
and press 2.
Press 1or 3to choose the
number of exposures that will
be combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
A The D Button
If Multiple exposure is selected for
Custom Setting f9 (Assign BKT button;
exposure mode by pressing the D button
and rotating the main command dial and
the number of shots by pressing the D
button and rotating the sub-command
dial. The mode and number of shots are
shown in the top control panel:
nF appears when On (series) is selected and n when On (single
photo) is selected; no icon appears when multiple exposure is off.
t
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Choose the amount of
gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press
2.
The following options will be
displayed. Highlight an option
and press J.
• On: Gain is adjusted
according to number of
exposures actually recorded
(gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for
3 exposures, etc.).
• Off: Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Recommended if background is dark.
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous high-speed and continuous low-
exposures in a single burst. If On (series) is selected, the
camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the
shutter-release button is pressed; if On (single photo) is
selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first
photograph. In self-timer mode, the camera will automatically
record the number of exposures selected in Step 3 on page
212, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3
shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer)
> Interval between shots. In other release modes, one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button
is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been
recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure
before all photographs are recorded, see page 214).
t
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The n icon will flash until shooting ends.
If On (series) is selected, multiple
exposure shooting will only end when
Off is selected for multiple exposure
mode; if On (single photo) is selected,
multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the
multiple exposure is complete. The n icon clears from the
display when multiple exposure shooting ends.
❚❚Interrupting Multiple Exposures
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, select Off for multiple exposure mode.
If shooting ends before the specified number
of exposures have been taken, a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures
that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is on, gain will
be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded.
Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
t
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view. Taking
photographs in live view resets Multiple exposure mode to Off.
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in
The information listed in the playback photo information display
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot
in the multiple exposure.
A Voice Memos
Voice recording is disabled while multiple exposures are being shot, but
A Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have
been taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting
menu is ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single
photograph and interval timer shooting will end (if On (single photo) is
selected for multiple exposure mode, multiple exposure shooting will
also end automatically). Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval
timer shooting.
A Other Settings
While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards can not be
formatted and some menu items are grayed out and can not be
changed.
t
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
D Before Shooting
Select a release mode other than self-timer (E) when using the interval
timer. Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at
current settings and view the results in the monitor.
Before choosing a starting time, select Time zone and date in the setup
menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the
camera EN-EL18 battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery
before use or use an EH-6b AC adapter and EP-6 power connector
(available separately).
1 Select Interval timer
shooting in the
G button
shooting menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu and press 2.
t
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Choose a starting time.
Chose from the following
starting triggers.
• To start shooting immediately,
highlight Now and press 2.
Shooting begins about 3 s
after settings are completed; proceed to Step 3.
•
To choose a starting time
highlight Start time and
press to display the start
time options shown at right.
Press or to highlight
hours or minutes and press
or to change. Press to continue.
,
2
4
2
1
3
2
3 Choose the interval.
Press 4or 2to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds;
press 1or 3to change.
Choose an interval longer than
the slowest anticipated shutter
speed. Press 2to continue.
t
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Press 4or 2to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots; press 1or 3to
change. Press 2to continue.
Number of Number Total
intervals of shots/ number of
interval shots
5 Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J
(to return to the shooting
menu without starting the
interval timer, highlight
J button
Off and press J). The first
series of shots will be taken
at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if Now was
selected for Choose start time in Step 2. Shooting will
continue at the selected interval until all shots have been
taken. Note that because shutter speed and the time needed
to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to
shot, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start
of the next shot may vary. If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of A is
currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time
is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the
monitor.
t
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure,
D Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
D Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can not be combined with long time-
A Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography.
If exposure, flash, or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is
active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take
one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program.
t
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q
icon will flash in the top control panel.
Immediately before the next shooting interval
begins, the shutter speed display will show the
number of intervals remaining, and the
aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current
interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-
release button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed
and aperture will be displayed until the standby timer expires).
To view current interval timer settings, select
Interval timer shooting between shots. While
interval timer photography is in progress, the
interval timer menu will show the starting time,
the shooting interval, and the number of
intervals and shots remaining. None of these
items can be changed while interval timer
photography is in progress.
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The
monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each
interval.
t
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and
pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off)
• Selecting self-timer (E) release mode
To resume shooting:
1 Choose a new starting
time.
Choose a new starting time as
described on page 217.
2 Resume shooting.
Highlight Restart and
press J. Note that if
interval timer photography
was paused during
J button
shooting, any shots
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.
t
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
• Resetting settings for the current shooting menu bank using the
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.
❚❚No Photograph
The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following
situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was
due to start: the photograph or photographs for the previous
interval have yet to be taken, the memory buffer is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses again
before each shot). Shooting will resume with the next interval.
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high
speed) mode, photographs will be taken at the rate given on page 112.
In S (single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes, photographs
will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d2 (Shooting speed,
reduced.
t
A Shooting Menu Banks
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks
reset as follows:
• Choose start time: Now
• Interval: 00:01':00"
• Number of shots: 1
• Start shooting: Off
• Number of intervals: 1
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Time-Lapse Photography
The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to
create a silent time-lapse movie using the options currently
A Before Shooting
Before beginning time-lapse photography, take a test shot at current
settings (framing the photo in the viewfinder for an accurate exposure
preview) and view the results in the monitor. To record changes in
recommend that you briefly switch to movie live view and check the
time-lapse photography is not available in live view.
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins. To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an
optional EH-6b AC adapter and EP-6 power connector or a fully-charged
EN-EL18 battery.
1 Select Time-lapse
photography in the
shooting menu.
G button
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Time-lapse
photography in the shooting menu and press 2.
t
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Press 2.
Press 2to proceed to Step 3
and choose an interval and
shooting time. To record a
time-lapse movie using the
default interval of 5 seconds and shooting time of 25 minutes,
proceed to step 5.
3 Choose the interval.
Press 4or 2to highlight
minutes, or seconds; press 1or
3to change. Choose an
interval longer than the
slowest anticipated shutter
speed. Press 2to continue.
4 Select the shooting time.
Press 4or 2to highlight hours
or minutes; press 1or 3to
change. The maximum
shooting time is 7 hours and
59 minutes. Press 2to
continue.
t
D Frame Size
The area used for metering exposure, flash level, or auto white balance
when photographs are recorded at a movie frame size of 1920 × 1080;
30 fps; crop, 1920 × 1080; 25 fps; crop, or 1920 × 1080; 24 fps; crop
result that optimal results may not be achieved. Take test shots and
check the results in the monitor.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Start shooting.
Highlight On and press J
(to return to the shooting
menu without starting
time-lapse photography,
highlight Off and press J).
J button
Time-lapse photography starts after 3 s. The camera takes
photographs at the interval selected in Step 3 for the time
selected in Step 4. The memory card access lamp lights while
each shot is recorded; note that because shutter speed and
the time needed to record the image to the memory card may
vary from shot to shot, the interval between a shot being
recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. Shooting
will not begin if a time-lapse movie can not be recorded at
current settings (for example, if the memory card is full, the
interval or shooting time is zero, or the interval is longer than
the shooting time).
When complete, time-lapse movies are recorded to the
memory card selected for Movie settings > Destination
D Time-Lapse Photography
t
A Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take one shot
at each interval. The self-timer can not be used.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Calculating the Length of the Final Movie
The total number of frames in the final movie
can be calculated by dividing the shooting time
by the interval and rounding up. The length of
the final movie can then be calculated by diving
the number of shots by the frame rate selected
for Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate. A
48 frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080;
Length recorded/
maximum length
24 fps, for example, will be about two seconds
long. The maximum length for movies recorded
using time-lapse photography is 20 minutes.
Memory card
indicator
Frame size/
frame rate
A Cover the Viewfinder
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder
interfering with exposure, close the viewfinder
A During Shooting
During time-lapse photography, Q will flash
and the time-lapse recording indicator will be
displayed in the top control panel. The time
remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in the
shutter-speed display immediately before each
frame is recorded. At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by
pressing the shutter-release button halfway. Regardless of the option
timer will not expire during shooting.
To view current time-lapse photography
settings, press the G button between shots.
While time-lapse photography is in progress, the
time-lapse photography menu will show the
interval and the time remaining. These settings
can not be changed while time-lapse
t
photography is in progress, nor can pictures be
played back or other menu settings adjusted.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Interrupting Time-Lapse Photography
Time-lapse photography will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. The following will also end time-lapse photography:
• Selecting Start > Off in the Time-lapse photography menu
• Pressing the J button between frames or immediately after a
frame is recorded
• Turning the camera off
• Removing the lens
• Connecting a USB or HDMI cable
• Inserting a memory card into an empty slot
• Pressing the shutter-release button all the way down to take a
photograph
A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where
time-lapse photography ended. Note that time-lapse
photography will end and no movie will be recorded if the power
source is removed or disconnected or the destination memory
card is ejected.
❚❚No Photograph
The camera will skip the current frame if the camera is unable to
focus in AF-S (note that the camera focuses again before each shot).
Shooting will resume with the next frame.
A Image Review
The K button can not be used to view pictures while time-lapse
photography is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a
few seconds after each shot if On is selected for Image review in the
performed while the frame is displayed.
t
A See Also
For information on setting a beep to sound when time-lapse
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Non-CPU Lenses
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
A Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
t
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The camera can store data for up to nine non-CPU lenses. To enter
or edit data for a non-CPU lens:
1 Select Non-CPU lens
G button
data in the setup menu.
Press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Non-CPU lens
data in the setup menu
and press 2.
2 Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4or 2to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.
3 Enter the focal length and
aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm)
or Maximum aperture and
press 4or 2to edit the
highlighted item. Focal length can be selected from values
between 6 and 4,000 mm, maximum aperture from values
between f/1.2 and f/22.
t
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select Done.
Highlight Done and press
J. The specified focal
length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen
lens number.
J button
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “Press +
command dials” option for a camera control in the Custom
be assigned to the Fn button (Custom Setting f3, Assign Fn
2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected control and rotate the main or sub-
command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in
the top control panel.
Focal Maximum
length aperture
t
Lens number
Main command dial
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using a GPS Unit
A GPS unit can be connected to the ten-pin remote terminal,
allowing the current latitude, longitude, altitude, Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), and heading to be recorded with each
photograph taken. The camera can be used with an optional GP-1
GPS unit (see below; note that the GP-1 does not provide the
compass heading), or with third-party units connected via an
❚❚The GP-1 GPS Unit
The GP-1 is an optional GPS unit designed for use with Nikon
digital cameras. For information on connecting the unit, see the
manual provided with the GP-1.
t
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Other GPS Units
Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of the
National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data format
can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal using
Operation has been confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin
geko series devices equipped with a PC interface cable connector.
These devices connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub
9-pin connector provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device.
See the MC-35 instruction manual for details. Before turning the
camera on, set the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud); see the
documentation provided with the GPS device for more
information.
MC-35
t
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A The k Icon
Connection status is shown by the k icon:
• k (static): Camera has established
communication with a GPS device. Photo
information for pictures taken while this icon
is displayed include an additional page of GPS
• k (flashing): The GPS device is searching for a signal. Pictures taken
while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data.
• No icon: No new GPS data have been received from the GPS device for
at least two seconds.
Pictures taken when the k icon is not displayed do not include GPS
data.
A Heading
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is
equipped with a digital compass (note that the
GP-1 is not equipped with a compass). Keep the
GPS device pointing in the same direction as the
lens and at least 20cm (8 in.) from the camera.
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.
t
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
• Standby timer: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
Enable acquire GPS data when a GP-1 is connected, the delay is
extended by up to one minute after exposure meters are
activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the
drain on the battery.
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.
Disable
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS device is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading (if supported) as
reported by the GPS device.
• Use GPS to set camera clock: Select Yes to synchronize the
camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
t
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
More About Playback
Viewing Images
W
W
W
X
X
X
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K button. The
most recent photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. Additional pictures can be displayed by
pressing 4or 2; to view additional information on
K button
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the W button when
a picture is displayed full frame. The number of
images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each
time the W button is pressed, and decreases with
each press of the X button. Use the multi selector
to highlight images and press the center of the
multi selector to view the highlighted image full
frame.
W button
I
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Controls
J: Use in combination with the multi
H:Record and play
voice memos
selector as described below
Display slot/folder selection dialog. To choose card and
folder from which pictures are played back, highlight slot
and press 2to display list of folders, then highlight folder
and press J.
J+
J+
J+
J+
embed IPTC preset in current photo, highlight preset and
press J (any preset already embedded in current photo
will be replaced).
Upload photographs over a wireless or Ethernet network
I
A Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select a memory card for
playback by pressing the W button when 72 thumbnails are displayed.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
A Image Review
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not
rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in
the current series displayed.
A Resuming Shooting
To turn the monitor off and return to shooting mode, press K or press
the shutter-release button halfway. Photographs can be taken
immediately.
A The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to
highlight pictures in the thumbnail
display and in displays like that shown
at right.
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
center of the multi selector, see Custom Setting f1 (Multi selector
for image or menu navigation, see Custom Setting f10 (Customize
I
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-
frame playback. Press 1or 3to cycle through photo information
as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting data, RGB
histograms, and highlights are only displayed if corresponding
data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo
was taken, while IPTC presets are displayed only if embedded in
1
/
12
N
I
KON
D4
1/12
.
1
125 F5
6
100
50mm
0,
0
_
.
_
.
100NC_D4
04
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
M
AL
100NC_D4
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
MAL
492N8Ox3R280
15
/
/
2011 10 02 27
492N8Ox3R280
15
/
04
/
2011 10 02 27
:
:
File information
None (image only)
Overview data
-
100
1
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
AT I TUDE
N
E
.
35
º
º
35 971
'
'
LONG I TUDE
.
139
35
43 696
ALT I TUDE
T I
M
E
UTC
15
/
m04
/2011
(
)
:
:
01 15 00
Highlights
RGB
Select R, G, B
-
100 1
N
I
KON
D4
Highlights
GPS data
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
,
.
F5
TR SP
D
AP
1
125
6
IPTC
E
MXP.
M
O
D
E
, I S
O
H
100
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Caption
0. 0
F
OCAL LE
N
GT
50mm
50
Event ID
LE
S
1. 4
A
FN
VR
S
Headline
Object Name
City
State
Country
FL
A
S
H
TYPE
SYNC MODE
,
-
100
1
I
RGB
-
-
100 1
N
I
KON
D4
100
1
N
I
KO
N
D4
RGB histogram
Shooting data
IPTC preset
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚File Information
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7 Frame number/total number of frames
1
/
12
15
14
13
_
.
100NC_D4
D
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
M
AL
8
:
15
/
04
/
2011 10 02 27
492N8Ox3R280
12
11
10
9
2 If photograph was taken using AF-S, display shows point where focus first locked. If
photograph was taken using AF-C, focus point is only displayed if option other than
auto-area AF was selected for AF-area mode and camera was able to focus.
3 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
I
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Highlights
1
2
1 Image highlights 1
-
1
3 Highlight display indicator
4 Current channel 1
100
Highlights
RGB
Select R, G, B
4
3
1
Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4or 2to cycle through channels as
follows:
W button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
B
(green)
(blue)
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
I
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚RGB Histogram
1 Image highlights 1
5
6
7
8
1
2
Color temperature ................................160
White balance fine-tuning..................156
Preset manual ........................................163
-
100
1
3
4
4 Current channel 1
RGB
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives pixel
brightness, vertical axis number of
pixels.
6 Histogram (red channel)
7 Histogram (green channel)
8 Histogram (blue channel)
1
Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold W button
and press 4or 2to cycle through channels as
follows:
W button
RGB
R
G
B
(all channels)
(red)
(green)
(blue)
Highlight display off
2 Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
I
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press
X. Use the
X
and
W
buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the
image with the multi selector. The histogram will
be updated to show only the data for the portion
of the image visible in the monitor.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains objects with
a wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
I
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Shooting Data
,
,
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
,
,
.
,
.
TR SPDD AP
1
8000 F2
8
MXP.
M
O
E
, I S
O
Hi 0 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
.
E
+
+
5
1mm3,
6
F
OCAL LE
N
G
T
H
50
LE
S
50
1. 4
A
FN
VR
C
FL
A
S
H
TYPE
Optional
SYNC MODE
,
SL
O
W
+ .
1
,
TTL-BL
0
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3
7 Flash type 4
-
1
N
I
KON
D4
100
Commander mode 4
10
11 12
10 Camera name
Color temperature ................................160
White balance fine-tuning..................156
Preset manual ........................................163
:
:
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
W
HITE
B
A
LANCE AUTO1
,
0, 0
CO
PI
L
OR
SPAC
E
sRGB
C
TURE TRL : STANDARD
C
QUICK ADJUST
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
3
0
0
0
0
S
H
A
RPE
N
ING
ST
ESS
TI
CO
BRI
TUR
N
TR
A
G
H
T
N
S
A
A
O
N
H
UE
-
100 1
N
I
KO
N
D4
I
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Long exposure noise reduction ........ 302
:
:
:
:
:
22
23
24
25
26
NOISE REDUC.
ACT. D-LIGHT.
HDR
HI ISO/LONG EXP.
NORMAL
AUTO, NORMAL
NORMAL
VIGNETTE CTRL
RETOUCH
WARM FILTER
HDR smoothing .................................... 188
COMMENT
:
SPRING HAS COME.
27
-
100 1
N
I
KON
D4
28
29
:
:
ARTIST
PYRI GHT
NIKON TARO
NI KON
C
O
The fourth page of the shooting data is
only displayed if copyright information was
recorded with the photograph as described
on page 353.
-
100 1
N
I
KON
D4
1
2
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
a value other than zero for any metering method.
Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Standard Vivid, Portrait, and Landscape Picture Controls only.
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
Monochrome Picture Controls only.
I
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Latitude
2 Longitude
3 Altitude
4 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
5 Heading 2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
L
AT I TUDE
N
E
1
2
.
35
º
º
35 971
'
'
LONG I TUDE
.
139
35
43 696
ALT I TUDE
T I
M
E
UTC
15
/
m04
/2011
3
4
5
(
)
:
:
01 15 00
6 Camera name
-
1
N
I
KON
D4
100
6
7
8
1
2
3
Data for movies are for start of recording.
Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.
Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
1 Caption
2 Event ID
3 Headline
4 Object name
IPTC
Caption
:
:
1
2
Event ID
3
4
5
6
7
:
:
:
:
:
Headline
Object Name
City
State
Country
5 City
6 State
7 Country
-
N
I
KON
D4
100
1
8
9
10
8 Camera name
11 Category
12 Supplemental Categories (Supp. Cat.)
13 Byline
IPTC
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Category
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Supp. Cat
Byline
Byline title
Writer/Editor
Credit
14 Byline title
Source
15 Writer/editor
16 Credit
17 Source
-
100 1
N
I
KON
D4
I
1
Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Overview Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
NIKON D4
1
/12
16 17
18
19 20
7
.
.
1
8000 F2
8
H
i 0
3
50mm
N
21
30
29
22
23
+
.
–
1. 3
1 0
SLOW
.
.
1
8000 F2
8
H
i 0
3
50mm
N
0,
0
+
–
.
1
1. 3
0
SLOW
0,
0
D
28
27 26
25 24
_
.
15
100NC_D4
S
C
:
0001 JP
G
MAL
8
:
15
/04
14
/
2011 10 15 00
492N8Ox3R280
13 12 11 10
9
2 Voice memo icon ..................................255 19 Aperture ........................................ 128, 129
3 Protect status.........................................249 20 ISO sensitivity 2...................................... 117
4 Retouch indicator .................................361 21 Focal length .................................. 228, 389
5 Camera name
7 Histogram showing the distribution of
Color temperature................................ 160
Preset manual ....................................... 163
Commander mode
1
2
Displayed in yellow if picture is in non-FX format (including DX-based movie format;
Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
I
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking a Closer Look:
Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image
displayed in full-frame playback or on the image
currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The
following operations can be performed while
zoom is in effect:
X button
To
Use
Description
Press X to zoom 36×24
(3 : 2) format images in
to maximum of
approximately 30 ×
(large images), 23 ×
(medium images) or
Zoom in
or out
X / W
15 × (small images). Press W to zoom out.
While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector
to view areas of image not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when zoom
ratio is altered; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border.
Faces (up to 35)
View
other
areas of
image
detected during zoom
are indicated by white
borders in navigation
window. Rotate sub-
Select
faces
I
command dial to view
other faces.
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To
Use
Description
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other photos at current zoom
ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a
movie is displayed.
View
other
images
Change
protect
status
L (Z/Q)
Return to
shooting
mode
Press the shutter-release button halfway or
press the K button to exit to shooting
mode.
/
K
Display
menus
G
I
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L (Z/Q)
button can be used to protect photographs from accidental
deletion. Protected files can not be deleted using the O (Q)
button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2 Press the L (Z/Q)
button.
The photograph will be
marked with a P icon. To
remove protection from
the photograph so that it
can be deleted, display
the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then
L (Z/Q) button
I
press the L (Z/Q) button.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Voice Memos
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos
that may have been recorded with the images. Voice memo overwrite
status can not be set separately.
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (Z/Q) and O (Q)
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
I
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting Photographs
To delete all photographs in the current folder or the photograph
displayed in full-frame playback or highlighted in the thumbnail
list, press the O (Q) button. To delete multiple selected
photographs, use the Delete option in the playback menu. Once
deleted, photographs can not be recovered. Note that pictures
that are protected or hidden can not be deleted.
Full-Frame and Thumbnail Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2 Press the O (Q)
O (Q) button
button.
The menu shown at right
will be displayed;
highlight Selected image
(to delete all pictures in
the folder currently
selected for playback—
choose a slot).
I
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Delete the photograph(s).
To delete the photograph or photographs, press the O (Q)
button (Selected image) or J button (All images). To exit
without deleting the photograph or photographs, press the
K button.
A See Also
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
next image or the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted
A Voice Memos
If a voice memo has been recorded with the
selected image, the confirmation dialog shown
at right will be displayed when Selected image
is chosen in Step 2 on the previous page. This
dialog is not displayed when All images is
selected.
I
• Image/voice memo: Select this option and press the O (Q) button to
delete both photo and voice memo.
• Voice memo only: Select this option and press the O (Q) button to
delete only the voice memo.
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo, press K.
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Playback Menu
Select Delete in the playback menu to delete pictures and their
associated voice memos. Note that depending on the number of
images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Q Selected
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
R All
❚❚Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Choose Selected for the G button
Delete option in the
playback menu.
Press the G button and
select Delete in the
playback menu. Highlight
Selected and press 2.
2 Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X button
X button; to view images
in other locations, press W
and select the desired card
and folder as described on
I
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the center of the multi
selector to select the
highlighted picture. Selected
pictures are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select
additional pictures; to deselect a picture, highlight it and press
the center of the multi selector.
4 Press J to complete
the operation.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight
Yes and press J.
J button
I
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e
Voice Memos
Recording Voice Memos
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to
photographs using the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo
microphones.
Readying the Camera for Recording
Before recording voice memos, adjust settings using the Voice
memo options item in the setup menu.
❚❚Voice Memo
This option controls whether voice memos
are recorded automatically or manually. The
following options are available:
Option
Description
7
Off
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.
Selecting this option displays
menu shown at right; select
maximum recording time from
5, 10, 20, 30, 45, or 60 s. Unless
On is selected for Image
review in playback menu
On
(Auto and
manual)
8
when shutter-release button is released after
shooting. Recording ends when H button is pressed
or after specified recording time has ended.
Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph
e
Manual
only
9
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Voice Memo Overwrite
This option controls whether the voice memo
for the most recent photograph can be
overwritten in shooting mode. The following
options are available:
Option
Description
Voice memo can not be recorded in
Disable shooting mode if one already exists for
most recent image.
Voice memo can be recorded in
shooting mode even if one already
Existing memo will be deleted and
replaced by new memo.
❚❚Voice Memo Button
This option controls manual recording. The
following options are available:
Option
Description
Voice memo is recorded while H
button is held down. Recording
will end automatically after 60 s.
Recording begins when H
Pressand
hold
!
Press to button is pressed and ends
$ start/
when H button is pressed again.
Recording will end
stop
automatically after 60 s.
A Voice Memo
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear
control panel.
e
On (auto and manual)
Manual only
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)
a voice memo will be added to the most recent photograph when
shooting ends. Recording will end when the H button is pressed
or after the specified recording time has ended.
Manual Recording (Shooting Mode)
If On (Auto and manual) or Manual only is
memo can be recorded for the most recent
photograph by pressing and holding the H
button. A voice memo will be recorded while
the button is held down (note that no voice
memo will be recorded if the H button is not
H button
held down for at least one second).
D Automatic Recording
Voice memos will not be recorded automatically during live view
playback menu. A voice memo can however be added to the
photograph displayed during image review even if Off is selected for
Voice memo.
A Secondary slot function
e
If two memory cards are inserted and Backup or RAW primary, JPEG
secondary is selected for the Secondary slot function option (
95) in
the shooting menu, voice memos will be associated with the images
recorded to the memory card in the primary slot.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playback Mode
To add a voice memo to the photograph currently displayed in
1 Choose a photograph.
Display or highlight the photograph.
Only one voice memo can be recorded
per image; additional voice memos can
not be recorded for images already
marked with a h icon.
2 Press and hold the H button.
A voice memo will be recorded while the
H button is held down (note that no voice
memo will be recorded if the H button is
not held down for at least one second).
H button
A During Recording
During recording, the C icon in the rear
control panel will flash. A countdown timer
in the rear control panel shows the length of
the voice memo that can be recorded (in
Rear control panel
seconds).
In playback mode, a C icon is displayed in the
monitor during recording.
e
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Interrupting Recording
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls
may end recording. During interval timer photography, recording ends
automatically about two seconds before the next photograph is taken.
Recording also ends automatically when the camera is turned off.
A After Recording
If a voice memo has been recorded for the
most recent photograph, a C icon will be
displayed in the rear control panel.
Rear control panel
If a voice memo exists for the photograph
currently selected in playback mode, a h icon
will be displayed in the monitor.
A Voice Memo File Names
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form
“xxxxnnnn.WAV,” where “xxxxnnnn” is a file name copied from the image
with which the voice memo is associated. For example, the voice memo
for the image “DSC_0002.JPG” would have the file name
“DSC_0002.WAV.” Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer.
e
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Voice Memos
Voice memos can be played back over the
camera’s built-in speaker when the associated
image is viewed in full-frame playback or
presence of a voice memo is indicated by an
h icon.
To
Press
Description
Press H to start playback. Playback will end
when H button is pressed again or entire
memo has been played back.
Start/end playback
Delete voice memo
H
O
See page 252.
e
A Interrupting Playback
Pressing the shutter-release button or operating other camera controls
may end playback. Playback ends automatically when another image is
selected or the camera is turned off.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Memo Playback Options
The Voice memo options > Audio output
item in the setup menu controls whether
voice memos are played back by the camera
(from either the built-in speaker or optional
headphones) or by a device to which the
camera is connected via an HDMI cable.
When sound is played back by the camera,
the Audio output option also controls
playback volume.
Option
Description
Voice memos are played
back over built-in speaker or
(if connected) over optional
headphones. Selecting this
option displays menu shown
at right. Press 1or 3to
Speaker/
headphones
%
change volume. Beep will
sound when option is selected. Press J to make
selection and return to setup menu.
Audio signal output to HDMI terminal.
Voice memos are not played back. b icon is
displayed when photo for which voice memo exists
is viewed in monitor.
&
(
HDMI
Off
e
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Connections
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E15 USB cable
to connect the camera to a computer.
Before Connecting the Camera
Before connecting the camera, install the software on the supplied
ViewNX 2 installer CD. To ensure that data transfer is not
interrupted, be sure the camera EN-EL18 battery is fully charged. If
in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-6b AC
adapter and EP-6 power connector (available separately).
❚❚Supplied Software
ViewNX 2 includes a
Your Imaging Toolbox
“Nikon Transfer 2” function for
copying pictures from the
camera to the computer,
where ViewNX 2 can be used
to view and print selected
images or to edit photographs and movies. Before installing
ViewNX 2, confirm that your computer meets the system
requirements on page 266.
Q
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Start the computer and insert the ViewNX 2 installer
CD.
Windows
Mac OS
Double-click icon on
desktop
Double-clickWelcome
icon
2 Select a language.
If the desired language is not
available, click Region Selection
to choose a different region and
then choose the desired
language (region selection is not
available in the European
release).
q Select region (if required)
w Select
e Click Next
language
3 Start the installer.
Click Install and follow the on-
Click Install
screen instructions.
D Installation Guide
Q
For help installing ViewNX 2, click
Installation Guide in Step 3.
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Exit the installer.
Click Yes (Windows) or OK (Mac OS) when installation is
complete.
Windows
Mac OS
Click Yes
Click OK
The following software is installed:
• ViewNX 2
• Apple QuickTime (Windows only)
5 Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.
D Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
Close the connector cover when the connector is not in use.
A Windows
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet
connection required).
A Camera Control Pro 2
used to control the camera from a computer. When
Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly to the
computer, the capture mode indicator (c) will appear and the PC
connection indicator will flash in the top control panel.
Q
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D System Requirements
Windows
• Photos/JPEG movies: Intel Celeron, Pentium 4, or Core series,
1.6 GHz or better
• H.264 movies (playback): 3.0 GHz or better Pentium D; Intel Core i5
or better recommended when viewing movies with a frame
size of 1,280 × 720 or more at a frame rate of 30 fps or above or
movies with a frame size of 1,920 × 1,080 or more
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo
Pre-installed versions of Windows 7 Home Basic/
Home Premium/Professional/Enterprise/Ultimate (Service Pack 1),
Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/
Ultimate (Service Pack 2), or 32-bit editions of Windows XP
Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 3). All installed programs
run as 32-bit applications in 64-bit editions of Windows 7 and
Windows Vista.
CPU
OS
• Windows 7/Windows Vista: 1 GB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
• Windows XP: 512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
RAM
A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more
recommended)
Hard-disk space
• Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA)
or more recommended)
• Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or more
Monitor
Mac OS
• Photos/JPEG movies: PowerPC G4 (1 GHz or better), G5, Intel Core, or
Xeon series
• H.264 movies (playback): PowerPC G5 Dual or Core Duo, 2 GHz or
better; Intel Core i5 or better recommended when viewing
movies with a frame size of 1,280 × 720 or more at a frame rate
of 30 fps or above or movies with a frame size of 1,920 × 1,080
or more
CPU
• H.264 movies (editing): 2.6 GHz or better Core 2 Duo
• GPU that supports QuickTime H.264 hardware acceleration
recommended
Mac OS X version 10.5.8, 10.6.8, or 10.7.2
OS
512 MB or more (2 GB or more recommended)
RAM
A minimum of 500 MB available on the startup disk (1 GB or more
recommended)
Hard-disk space
• Resolution: 1024 × 768 pixels (XGA) or more (1280 × 1024 pixels (SXGA) or
more recommended)
• Color: 24-bit color (millions of colors) or more
Q
Monitor
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct USB Connection
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E15 USB cable.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Turn the computer on.
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3 Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
D The USB Cable Clip
To prevent cable from being disconnected, attach the clip as
shown.
4 Turn the camera on.
Q
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Start Nikon Transfer 2.
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program,
select Nikon Transfer 2.
A Windows 7
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as
described below.
1
Under Import pictures and
videos, click Change program.
A program selection dialog will
be displayed; select Import file
using Nikon Transfer 2 and
click OK.
2
Double-click Import file.
6 Click Start Transfer.
At default settings, all the pictures on
the memory card will be copied to the
computer (for more information on
using Nikon Transfer 2, start ViewNX 2 or
Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2
Help from the Help menu).
Start Transfer
7 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable
when transfer ends.
Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is
complete.
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while
transfer is in progress.
Q
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet and Wireless Networks
The camera can be connected to Ethernet or wireless networks
using the built-in Ethernet port or an optional WT-5 or WT-4
wireless transmitter. Note that an Ethernet cable (available
separately from commercial sources) is required for an Ethernet
connection.
❚❚The Built-in Ethernet Port and WT-5 Wireless Transmitter
The following modes are available when the camera is connected
to a network using the built-in Ethernet port or an optional WT-5
wireless transmitter:
Mode
FTP upload
Image transfer
Camera
Function
Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp
server, or upload new photos as they are taken.
Control camera from computer using
control
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
Take photos and view existing photos remotely from a
browser-equipped computer or iPhone.
HTTP server
Synchronized
release (WT-5
only)
Synchronize the shutter releases of multiple remote
cameras with a controlling “master” camera.
❚❚WT-4 Wireless Transmitter
The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:
Mode
Function
Upload existing photos and movies to a computer or ftp
server, or upload new photos as they are taken.
Transfer mode
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before
select mode upload.
Control camera from computer using
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately).
PC mode
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network
Print mode
computer.
Q
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, see the Network Guide and the
documentation provided with the wireless transmitter. Be sure to
update to the latest versions of the wireless transmitter firmware
and supplied software.
D Image Upload
In image transfer, ftp upload, and transfer modes, the picture currently
displayed in full-frame or thumbnail playback can be uploaded to the
computer by holding J and pressing the center of the multi selector.
A During Transfer
Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode
(“image transfer mode” applies when images are being transferred via
an Ethernet or wireless network and when images remain to be sent).
Live view photography is not available during transfer if Silent is
selected for Live view photography in the shooting menu.
A Movies
Movies can be uploaded in transfer mode if the camera is connected to
an Ethernet or a wireless network and Auto send or Send folder is not
selected for Transfer settings. Movies can not be uploaded in
thumbnail select mode (WT-4 only).
A HTTP Server Mode
The camera can not be used to record or view movies in http server
mode, while live view photography is not available if Silent is selected
for Live view photography in the shooting menu.
A Thumbnail Select Mode
Camera settings can not be changed from the computer in thumbnail
select mode.
A Wireless Transmitters
The principal differences between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E and
the WT-5 and WT-5A/B/C/D/E is in the number of channels supported;
unless otherwise stated, all references to the WT-4 also apply to the
WT-4A/B/C/D/E, while all references to the the WT-5 also apply to the
WT-5A/B/C/D/E.
Q
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Photographs
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer
D Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
A Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-6b AC adapter
and EP-6 power connector. When taking photographs to be printed via
A See Also
Q
printing.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E15 USB cable.
1 Turn the camera off.
2 Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
D USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the printer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub.
3 Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display.
q
w
Q
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Pictures One at a Time
1 Select a picture.
Press 4or 2to view additional
pictures. Press 1or 3to view
press the X button to zoom in
press K to exit zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press the
center of the multi selector. Use the multi selector to highlight
pictures, or press the center of the multi selector again to
display the highlighted picture full frame. To view images in
other locations, press W when thumbnails are displayed and
select the desired card and folder as described on page 236.
2 Display printing
options.
Press J to display
PictBridge printing
options.
J button
3 Adjust printing options.
Press 1or 3to highlight an option and press 2to select.
Option
Description
Highlight a page size (only sizes supported by the
current printer are listed) and press J to select and exit
to the previous menu (to print at the default page size
for the current printer, select Printer default).
Page size
No. of Press 1or 3to choose number of copies (maximum 99),
copies then press J to select and return to the previous menu.
Q
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Border Print with border (print photo with white border), or No
border and press J to select and exit to the previous
menu.
Highlight Printer default (use current printer settings),
Print time stamp (print times and dates of recording on
photos), or No time stamp and press J to select and
Time stamp
exit to the previous menu.
This option is available only if supported by the printer.
To exit without cropping, highlight No cropping and
press J. To crop the current picture, highlight Crop and
press 2.
Selecting Crop displays the
dialog shown at right. Press X to
Cropping
increase the size of the crop, W
to decrease. Position the crop
using the multi selector and press
J. Note that print quality may
drop if small crops are printed at
large sizes.
4 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press
J to start printing. To cancel
before all copies have been
printed, press J.
Q
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing Multiple Pictures
G button
1 Display the PictBridge
menu.
Press the G button in the
PictBridge playback display
(see Step 3 on page 272).
2 Choose an option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures
for printing.
• Print (DPOF): Print an
existing print order created with the DPOF print order
order will be displayed in Step 3.
• Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on
the memory card, proceed to Step 4. Note that if the
memory card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first
256 images will be printed.
Q
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures
on the memory card (to
view images in other
locations, press W and
select the desired card and
folder as described on
current picture full screen,
press and hold the X
L (Z/Q) button
button. To select the
current picture for printing,
press the L (Z/Q)
X button
button and press 1. The
picture will be marked with
a Z icon and the number
of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1or 3to
specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture,
press 3when the number of prints is 1). Continue until all the
desired pictures have been selected.
4 Display printing
options.
Press J to display
PictBridge printing
options.
J button
Q
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time stamp options as
selected page size is too small for an index print).
6 Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel before all copies have been printed,
press J.
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
1 Choose Select/set for
the DPOF print order
item in the playback
menu.
G button
Press the G button and
select DPOF print order in
the playback menu. Highlight Select/set and press 2(to
remove all photographs from the print order, select Deselect
all?).
Q
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures
on the memory card (to
view images in other
locations, press W and
select the desired card and
folder as described on
current picture in full
L (Z/Q) button
screen, press and hold the
X button. To select the
current picture for printing,
press the L (Z/Q)
X button
button and press 1. The
picture will be marked with
a Z icon and the number
of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the L (Z/Q) button pressed, press 1or 3to
specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the picture,
press 3when the number of prints is 1). Press J when all the
desired pictures have been selected.
3 Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2to toggle the highlighted
option on or off (to complete the print
order without including this
information, proceed to Step 4).
• Print shooting data: Print shutter speed and aperture on all
pictures in print order.
Q
• Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Complete the print
order.
Highlight Done and press
J to complete the print
order.
J button
D DPOF Print Orders
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the
PictBridge Time stamp option.
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough
space on the memory card to store the print order.
selected for printing using this option. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
images can be created using the NEF (RAW) processing option in the
Q
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Photographs on TV
A type C mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI)
cable (available separately from commercial sources) can be used
to connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
1 Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to high-definition
device (choose cable with
connector for HDMI
device)
Connect to
camera
3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4 Turn the camera on and press K button.
During playback, images will be displayed both in the camera
monitor and on the high-definition television or monitor
screen.
Q
D Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI Options
resolution and other advanced HDMI options.
❚❚Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the
HDMI device. If Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically select the
appropriate format. Regardless of the
option selected, Auto will be used for
movie live view, movie recording, and
playback.
❚❚Advanced
Option
Description
Auto is recommended in most situations. If the camera
is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal
output range for the HDMI device, you can choose from
the following options:
• Limited range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 16 to 235. Choose this option if you notice loss
of detail in shadows.
Output range
• Full range: For devices with an RGB video signal input
range of 0 to 255. Choose this option if shadows are
“washed out” or too bright.
Output display Choose horizontal and vertical frame coverage for HDMI
size
output from 95% or 100%.
If Off is selected when the camera is connected to an
HDMI device, shooting information will not be displayed
in the monitor during live view photography.
Live view on-
screen display
Q
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Television Playback
Use of an EH-6b AC adapter and EP-6 power connector (available
separately) is recommended for extended playback. Note that the
edges may not be visible when photographs are viewed on a television
screen.
Set HDMI to play back voice memos on the HDMI device.
A Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for
A Audio
plays in stereo when movies are viewed on HDMI devices using a
camera connected via an HDMI cable (note that audio will not be played
back over headphones connected to the camera). Volume can be
adjusted using television controls; the camera controls can not be used.
A HDMI and Live View
When the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, HDMI displays can be
movie live view and movie recording, HDMI output will be adjusted
according to the option selected for Movie settings > Frame size/
may not support the selected setting; in this case, select 1080i
output at a frame size smaller than that selected for Frame size/frame
Q
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
Menu Guide
DThe Playback Menu:
Managing Images
To display the playback menu, press G and select the K
(playback menu) tab.
G button
Option
0
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Playback display options
Copy image(s)
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
DPOF print order
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 412.
U
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Playback Folder
Option
NC_D4
All
Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D4 will be visible during
playback.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during
playback.
Current
G button ➜ D playback menu
Hide Image
Hide or reveal selected pictures as described below. Hidden
pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be
deleted by formatting the memory card.
D Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the
image.
1 Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and
press 2(to skip the remaining
steps and reveal all pictures,
highlight Deselect all? and
press J).
U
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view images in other locations, press W and select the
the center of the multi selector to select the current picture.
Selected pictures are marked by a R icon; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector.
3 Press J.
Press J to complete the
operation.
J button
G button ➜ D playback menu
Playback Display Options
Choose the information
available in the playback photo
Press 1or 3to highlight an
option, then press 2to select
the option for the photo
information display. A L
appears next to selected items;
to deselect, highlight and press
2. To return to the playback
menu, highlight Done and
U
J button
press J.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Copy Image(s)
Copy pictures from one memory card to another.
Option
Select source
Select image(s)
Select destination
folder
Description
Choose card from which pictures will be copied.
Select pictures to be copied.
Select destination folder on remaining card.
Copy selected pictures to specified destination.
Copy image(s)?
1 Choose Select source.
Highlight Select source and
press 2.
2 Select the source card.
Highlight the slot for the card
containing the images to be
copied and press J.
3 Choose Select image(s).
Highlight Select image(s) and
press 2.
U
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Select the source folder.
Highlight the folder containing
the images to be copied and
press 2.
5 Make the initial selection.
Before going on to select or
deselect individual images, you
can mark all or all protected
images in the folder for
copying by choosing Select all
images or Select protected images. To mark only
individually selected images for copying, choose Deselect all
before proceeding.
6 Select additional images.
Highlight pictures and press
the center of the multi selector
to select or deselect (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X
button). Selected images are marked with a L. Press J to
proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete.
7 Choose Select destination
folder.
Highlight Select destination
folder and press 2.
U
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Select a destination folder.
To enter a folder number, choose Select
folder by number, enter the number
To choose from a list of existing folders,
choose Select folder from list, highlight
a folder, and press J.
9 Copy the images.
Highlight Copy image(s)?
and press J.
J button
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed; highlight Yes and
press J. Press J again to exit
when copying is complete.
U
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Copying Images
Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination
card. Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.
If the destination folder contains an image with
the same name as one of the images to be
copied, a confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Select Replace existing image to replace the
image with the image to be copied, or select
Replace all to replace all existing images with
the same names without further prompting. To
continue without replacing the image, select Skip, or select Cancel to
exit without copying any further images. Hidden or protected files in the
destination folder will not be replaced.
not. Voice memos will be copied with their associated images. Hidden
images can not be copied.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically
displayed in the monitor immediately after
shooting. If Off is selected, pictures can only
be displayed by pressing the K button.
U
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ D playback menu
After Delete
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Show
next
Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last frame,
previous picture will be displayed.
S
Show
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first frame,
T
U
previous following picture will be displayed.
If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded,
following picture will be displayed as described for Show
Continue
next. If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse
as before
order, previous picture will be displayed as described for
Show previous.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Rotate Tall
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review.
Option
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically rotated for
display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken with Off selected for
(landscape) orientation.
On
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in “wide”
(landscape) orientation.
Off
U
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ D playback menu
Slide Show
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
Option
Start
Description
Start slide show.
Choose type of image displayed from Still images and
movies, Still images only, and Movies only.
Image type
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
Display menu of voice memo playback options
Audio playback
To start the slide show, highlight Start and
press J. The following operations can be
performed while the slide show is in
progress:
To
Press
Description
Skip back/skip
ahead
Press 4to return to previous frame, 2to skip
to next frame.
View additional
photo info
Change or hide photo info (still images only;
Pause or resume slide show. Voice memo
playback may continue after J button has
been pressed.
Pause/resume
J
Exit to playback
menu
Exit to playback
mode
G
K
End slide show and return to playback menu.
End slide show and exit to full-frame or
Exit to shooting
mode
Press shutter-release button halfway to return
to shooting mode.
U
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends. Select Restart to restart or
Exit to return to the playback menu.
❚❚Audio Playback
Choose On to play voice memos during slide shows (the sound
recorded with movies always plays regardless of the option
selected). The following options will be displayed:
Option
Description
Playback ends when next frame is displayed, even if
entire memo has not been played.
Frame interval
Next frame is not displayed until entire memo has been
played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice
memo.
Length of voice
memo
Choose Off to disable voice memo playback during slide shows.
U
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C
(shooting menu) tab.
G button
Option
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
Storage folder
0
Option
0
294 Color space
295 Active D-Lighting
296 HDR (high dynamic range)
298 Vignette control
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Multiple exposure
Interval timer shooting
Live view photography
153 Time-lapse photography
173 Movie settings
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 412.
U
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Shooting Menu Bank
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the
exceptions of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,
Interval timer shooting, Time-lapse photography, and
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on the
others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used settings,
select one of the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The
new settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is
turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be
and pressing 2.
A Shooting Menu Bank
The top control panel and information displays
show the current shooting menu bank.
A See Also
Exposure mode, shutter speed, and aperture can be included in
shooting menu banks using the Extended menu banks option in the
camera body to select the shooting menu bank, see Custom Setting f3
U
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the
O (Q) button
Shooting menu bank menu
and press O (Q). A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and
press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank.
settings.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Extended Menu Banks
Select On to include exposure mode, shutter
speed (modes f and h only), and aperture
(modes g and h only) in the information
recorded in each of the four shooting menu
banks, to be recalled whenever the bank is
selected. Selecting Off restores the values in
effect before On was selected.
U
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Storage Folder
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚Select Folder by Number
1 Choose Select folder by
number.
Highlight Select folder by
number and press 2. The
dialog shown at right will be
displayed, with the current
2 Choose a folder number.
Press 4or 2to highlight a digit, press 1or 3to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder.
3 Save changes and exit.
Press
J
to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without changing the storage folder, press the
button). If a folder with the specified number does not
G
already exist, a new folder will be created on the card in the
primary slot. Subsequent photographs will be stored in the
selected folder unless it is already full.
U
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Select Folder from List
1 Choose Select folder from
list.
Highlight Select folder from
list and press 2.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1or 3to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu. Subsequent photographs will be stored in
the selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A Startup Time
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of files or folders.
U
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
File Naming
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
“_DSC”, followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter
extension (e.g., “DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used
to select three letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name.
For information on editing file names, see page 180.
A Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF”
for TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.MOV” for movies, and
“.NDF” for dust off reference data. In each pair of photographs recorded
at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images
have the same file names but different extensions.
U
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. Choose sRGB for photographs that will be printed
or used “as is,” with no further modification. Adobe RGB has a
wider color gamut and is recommended for images that will be
extensively processed or retouched after leaving the camera.
A Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the
numeric values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB
color space is widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically
used in publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended
when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or
viewed in applications that do not support color management, or when
taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct
printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other
commercial print services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are DCF
compliant; applications and printers that support DCF will select the
correct color space automatically. If the application or device does not
support DCF, select the appropriate color space manually. An ICC color
profile is embedded in TIFF photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color
space, allowing applications that support color management to
automatically select the correct color space. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the application or device.
A Nikon Software
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately)
automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs
created with this camera.
U
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Vignette Control
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Vignette control reduces vignetting for type G and D lenses (DX
and PC lenses excluded). Its effects vary from lens to lens and are
most noticeable at maximum aperture. Choose from High,
Normal, Low, and Off.
A Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF
and JPEG images may exhibit noise (fog) or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls
that have been modified from default settings may not produce the
desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
U
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
Auto Distortion Control
Select On to reduce barrel distortion when
shooting with wide-angle lenses and to
reduce pin-cushion distortion when
shooting with long lenses (note that the
edges of the area visible in the viewfinder
may be cropped out of the final photograph,
and that the time needed to process photographs before
recording begins may increase). This option does not apply to
movies and is available only with type G and D lenses (PC, fisheye,
and certain other lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed
with other lenses. Before using auto distortion control with DX
lenses, select On for Auto DX crop or choose an image area of DX
cropped photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral
distortion.
A Retouch: Distortion Control
For information on creating copies of existing photographs with
reduced barrel and pin-cushion distortion, see page 377.
U
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Long Exposure NR
(Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
G button ➜ C shooting menu
If On is selected, photographs taken at
shutter speeds slower than 1 s will be
processed to reduce noise (bright spots,
randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog). The
time required for processing roughly doubles;
during processing, “l m” will flash in the
shutter speed/aperture displays and pictures
can not be taken (if the camera is turned off before processing is
complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be
performed). In continuous release mode, frame rates will slow and
while photographs are being processed, the capacity of the
memory buffer will drop.
G button ➜ C shooting menu
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce noise.
Option
High
Description
Reduce noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog),
particularly in photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities.
Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High,
Normal, and Low.
Normal
Low
Noise reduction is performed only at sensitivities of 3200 and
higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount
performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR.
Off
U
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACustom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To display the Custom Settings menu, press G and select the
A (Custom Settings menu) tab.
G button
Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit
individual preferences.
Custom Setting groups
Main menu
Custom settings
U
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting
Custom settings bank
Autofocus
Custom Setting
Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed
e2 Flash shutter speed
e3 Optional flash
e4 Exposure comp. for flash
e5 Modeling flash
e6 Auto bracketing set
e7 Auto bracketing (Mode M)
e8 Bracketing order
0
0
e
a
a1 AF-C priority selection
a2 AF-S priority selection
a4 AF activation
a5 Focus point illumination
a6 Focus point wrap-around
a7 Number of focus points
a8 Assign AF-ON button
f
Controls
a10 Store points by orientation
Metering/exposure
b1 ISO sensitivity step value
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl
b3 Exp./flash comp. step value
f2 Multi selector
f3 Assign Fn button
b
f4 Assign preview button
f5 Assign sub-selector
f6 Assign sub-selector center
f7 Assign Fn button (vert.)
f8 Shutter spd & aperture lock
f9 Assign BKT button
f10 Customize command dials
f11 Release button to use dial
f12 Slot empty release lock
f13 Reverse indicators
f14 Assign multi selector (vert.)
f15 Playback zoom
Timers/AE lock
c
c2 Standby timer
c3 Self-timer
c4 Monitor off delay
d
Shooting/display
d1 Beep
d2 Shooting speed
Movie
g
d3 Max. continuous release
d4 Exposure delay mode
d5 File number sequence
d6 Viewfinder grid display
d7 Control panel/viewfinder
d8 Screen tips
g1 Assign Fn button
g2 Assign preview button
g3 Assign sub-selector center
g4 Assign shutter button
d9 Information display
d10 LCD illumination
U
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
Custom Settings Bank
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption up to 20 characters long can be added
pressing 2.
❚❚Restoring Default Settings
To restore default settings,
highlight a bank in the Custom
settings bank menu and press
O (Q). A confirmation dialog
will be displayed; highlight Yes
and press J to restore default
settings for the selected bank
O (Q) button
U
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Custom Settings Bank
The top control panel and information displays
show the current Custom Settings bank.
A See Also
have been modified from default values, an asterisk will be displayed
adjacent to the altered settings in the second level of the Custom
Settings menu.
U
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a: Autofocus
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the
shutter-release button is pressed (release priority) or only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority).
Option
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
G
Release
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. If the subject is dark or low contrast and the
camera is in continuous mode, priority will be given to
focus for the first shot in each series and to frame rate
for the remaining shots, ensuring a high frame rate if the
distance to the subject does not change during
shooting.
Focus +
release
B
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Release +
focus
E
F
Focus
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when AF-C is
selected for autofocus mode. The camera will continue to adjust
focus until the shutter is released.
U
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the
camera is in focus (focus priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority) in single-servo autofocus.
Option
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
G
Release
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
F
Focus
Regardless of the option selected, if the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, focus will lock
while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus lock
continues until the shutter is released.
U
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject when AF-C is selected during
Option
5 (Long)
4
Description
C
(
D
)
E
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the
camera waits for the specified period before adjusting
3 (Normal) the distance to the subject. This prevents the camera
from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by
objects passing through the frame.
2
1 (Short)
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the
distance to the subject changes. Use when
photographing a series of subjects at varying distances
Off
in quick succession.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a4: AF Activation
If Shutter/AF-ON is selected, both the
shutter-release button and the B button
can be used to initiate autofocus. If AF-ON
only is selected, autofocus is only initiated
when the B button is pressed.
U
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a5: Focus Point Illumination
The options in this menu control whether or not the focus points
are illuminated.
Option
Description
Manual focus Choose On to display the active focus point in manual focus
mode
mode.
Choose On to display the active focus point in CH
(continuous high-speed) and CL (continuous low-speed)
modes.
Continuous
mode
Focus point Choose the brightness of the focus point display in the
brightness viewfinder from Extra high, High, Normal, and Low.
Choose On to display both the selected focus point and the
Dynamic-area surrounding focus points in dynamic-area AF mode
in the center of the focus point (n).
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a6: Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Option
Wrap
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps
around” from top to bottom, bottom
to top, right to left, and left to right,
so that, for example, pressing 2
w
q
when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder
display is highlighted (q) selects the corresponding focus
point at the left edge of the display (w).
The focus-point display is bounded by the outermost focus
No wrap points so that, for example, pressing 2when a focus point
at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
U
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a7: Number of Focus Points
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus-
point selection.
Option
Description
Choose from the 51 focus points shown at
right.
B 51 points
Choose from the 11 focus points shown at
right. Use for quick focus-point selection.
A 11 points
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a8: Assign AF-ON Button
Choose the function performed when the
B button is pressed.
Option
AF-ON
Description
A
B
Pressing the B button initiates autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the B button is
pressed.
AE/AF lock
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the B button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
AE lock (Reset remains locked until the button is pressed a second
D
on release)
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
Exposure locks when the B button is pressed, and
E AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
F
AF lock only Focus locks while the B button is pressed.
U
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a9: Assign AF-ON Button (Vert.)
Choose the function assigned to the B
button for vertical shooting.
Option
Same as AF-ON
button
Description
Both B buttons perform the function selected
for Custom Setting a8.
Pressing the vertical B button initiates
autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the vertical B
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
G
A
B
AF-ON
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
C
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
AE lock (Reset on pressed, and remains locked until the button is
D
release)
pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or
the standby timer expires.
Exposure locks when the vertical B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
pressed a second time or the standby timer
expires.
E AE lock (Hold)
Focus locks while the vertical B button is
pressed.
F
AF lock only
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
a10: Store Points by Orientation
If Yes is selected, separate focus points can be selected for “wide”
(landscape) orientation, for “tall” (portrait) orientation with the
camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for “tall” orientation with the
camera rotated 90° counterclockwise. Select No to use the same
focus point regardless of camera orientation.
U
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
b: Metering/Exposure
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
Select the increments used when making
possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is
maintained when the step value is changed. If
the current ISO sensitivity setting is not
available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity
will be rounded to the nearest available setting.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, and
bracketing.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b3: Exp./Flash Comp. Step Value
Select the increments used when making
adjustments to exposure and flash
compensation.
U
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will flash even
when exposure compensation is set to 0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the
command dials (see note below). The setting selected
On (Auto reset) using the command dial is reset when the camera turns off
or the standby timer expires (exposure compensation
settings selected using the E button are not reset).
As above, except that the exposure compensation value
On
selected using the command dial is not reset when the
camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button
and rotating the main command dial.
Off
A Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or
On is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f10 (Customize
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off
On
e
f
g
h
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A
U
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b5: Center-Weighted Area
When calculating exposure, center-weighted
metering assigns the greatest weight to a
circle in the center of the frame. The diameter
(φ) of this circle can be set to 8, 12, 15, or
20 mm or to the average of the entire frame.
Note that unless Average is selected, the diameter is fixed at
12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting
Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be used for
both CPU and non-CPU lenses.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
b6: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure
value selected by the camera. Exposure can
be fine-tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank
and is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-
situations.
U
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c: Timers/AE Lock
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c2: Standby Timer
Choose how long the camera continues to
meter exposure when no operations are
performed. The shutter-speed and aperture
displays in the top control panel and
viewfinder turn off automatically when the
standby timer expires.
Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life.
U
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c3: Self-Timer
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots
taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
• Self-timer delay: Choose the length of the
shutter-release delay.
• Number of shots: Press 1and 3to choose the
number of shots taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
• Interval between shots: Choose the interval
between shots when the Number of shots
is more than 1.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
c4: Monitor off Delay
Choose how long the monitor remains on
when no operations are performed during
playback (Playback; defaults to 10 s) and
image review (Image review; defaults to 4 s),
when menus (Menus; defaults to 20 s) or
information (Information display; defaults to
10 s) are displayed, or during live view and movie recording (Live
view; defaults to 10 minutes). Choose a shorter monitor-off delay
for longer battery life.
U
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
d: Shooting/Display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d1: Beep
Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the
locks during live view photography, or while the release timer is
during live view photography.
• Volume: Choose 3 (high), 2 (medium), 1 (low)
or Off (mute). When an option other than
Off is selected, c appears in the top control
panel and information display.
• Pitch: Choose High or Low.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d2: Shooting Speed
Choose the maximum frame advance rate for CH (continuous high-
speed) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes. For more
information on frame rate, see page 112.
Option
Description
Continuous Choose the frame advance rate for CH (continuous high-
high-speed speed) mode from 10 and 11 fps.
Continuous Choose the frame advance rate for CL (continuous low-
low-speed speed) mode from values between 1 and 10 fps.
U
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d3: Max. Continuous Release
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 200.
A The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d3, shooting will
information on the capacity of the memory buffer.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d4: Exposure Delay Mode
In situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, select 1 s 2 s, or
,
3 s to delay shutter release until one, two, or
three seconds after the mirror is raised.
Exposure delay is not available when Silent is
selected for Live view photography in the
shooting menu (
60).
U
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d5: File Number Sequence
When a photograph is taken, the camera
names the file by adding one to the last file
number used. This option controls whether
file numbering continues from the last
number used when a new folder is created,
the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted,
or a new memory card inserted in the camera, file
numbering continues from the last number used or from
the largest file number in the current folder, whichever is
higher. If a photograph is taken when the current folder
contains a photograph numbered 9999, a new folder will be
created automatically and file numbering will begin again
from 0001.
On
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is
created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory
card is inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is
created automatically if a photograph is taken when the
current folder contains 999 photographs.
Off
As for On, except that the next photograph taken is
assigned a file number by adding one to the largest file
number in the current folder. If the folder is empty, file
numbering is reset to 0001.
Reset
D File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.
Choose Reset for Custom Setting d5 (File number sequence) and then
either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
U
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d6: Viewfinder Grid Display
Choose On to display on-demand grid lines in
the viewfinder for reference when composing
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d7: Control Panel/Viewfinder
Choose the information displayed in the viewfinder and rear
control panel.
Option
Description
Choose from ISO sensitivity (9) and Exposures
Rear control remaining (k). If Exposures remaining is selected, ISO
panel
sensitivity will only be displayed while the S button is
pressed.
Choose from Frame count (l) and Exposures
remaining (k). Note that regardless of the option
selected, memory buffer capacity will be shown while
the shutter-release button is pressed.
Viewfinder
display
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d8: Screen Tips
Choose On to display tool tips for items
U
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d9: Information Display
If Auto (AUTO) is selected, the color of the lettering in the
white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background.
To always use the same color lettering, select Manual and choose
Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on dark (W; white
lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for
maximum contrast with the selected text color.
Dark on light
Light on dark
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
d10: LCD Illumination
If Off is selected, the control panel and button
backlights (illuminators) will only light while
the power switch is rotated toward
selected, the backlights will remain on while
D. If On is
regardless of the option selected, the
backlights turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed).
Select Off for increased battery life.
A Button Backlights
The following controls are equipped with backlights: the D, M, Y, G,
L (Z/Q), X, W, J, R, a, H, U, T, and S buttons and the
release mode dial.
U
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
e: Bracketing/Flash
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e1: Flash Sync Speed
This option controls flash sync speed.
Option
Description
Use auto FP high-speed sync when a compatible flash unit
is attached (
speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera shows a shutter
or , auto FP high-
193). If other flash units are used, shutter
1/250 s
(Auto FP) speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode
e
g
speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is
faster than 1/250 s.
1/250 s–1/60 s Flash sync speed set to selected value.
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel.
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by
the camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for
reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright
sunlight. The information display flash mode indicator shows “FP”
U
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
This option determines the slowest shutter
speed available when using front- or rear-
curtain sync or red-eye reduction in
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto
exposure modes (regardless of the setting
chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s
in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at flash
settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction
with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s) to 30 s (30 s).
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e3: Optional Flash
Choose a flash control mode for optional SB-400 flash units.
Option
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
r TTL
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full
power). Monitor pre-flashes are not emitted.
s
Manual
A Flash Control Mode
The flash control mode is shown in the
U
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e4: Exposure Comp. for Flash
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure
compensation is used.
Option
Description
Both flash level and exposure compensation are
adjusted to modify exposure over the entire frame.
YE Entire frame
Background
only
E
Exposure compensation applies to background only.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e5: Modeling Flash
If On is selected when the camera is used with
an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon
flash will be emitted when the camera Pv
is emitted if Off is selected.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e6: Auto Bracketing Set
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to bracket only
exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level bracketing, WB
ADL bracketing (y) to perform bracketing using Active
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
U
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e7: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e6 in manual
exposure mode.
Option
Description
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e6
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(Custom Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Setting e6 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e6 set to
AE & flash).
Flash/speed
F
G
Flash/speed/
aperture
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e6 set to
Flash/aperture AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
H
I
Setting e6 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e6
set to AE & flash).
Flash only
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not used,
ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot, regardless
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
e8: Bracketing Order
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), exposure, flash,
and white balance bracketing are performed in the order
selected, shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the
highest value. This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing.
U
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f: Controls
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f1: Multi Selector Center Button
This option determines the role assigned to the center of the multi
selector during viewfinder photography, playback, and live view
(regardless of the option selected, pressing the center of the multi
selector when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie
playback).
❚❚Shooting Mode
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Select center focus point.
None.
Select center focus point
Not used
J
❚❚Playback Mode
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Thumbnail on/off Toggle between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
n
o
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback,
View histograms a histogram is displayed while the center of the
multi selector is pressed.
Toggle between full-frame or thumbnail playback
and playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting
Zoom on/off
from Low magnification, Medium magnification,
and High magnification. The zoom display will
center on the active focus point.
p
u
Choose slot and
folder
U
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Live View
Option
Role assigned to center of multi selector
Select center Pressing the center of the multi selector in live view
J
focus point
selects the center focus point.
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle zoom
on and off. Choose the initial zoom setting from
Zoom on/off Low magnification, Medium magnification, and
High magnification. The zoom display will center
on the active focus point.
p
Pressing the center of the multi selector has no
effect in live view.
Not used
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f2: Multi Selector
If Restart standby timer is selected,
operating the multi selector when the
meters and start the standby timer. If Do
nothing is selected, the timer will not start
when the multi selector is pressed.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f3: Assign Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials).
U
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Press
Selecting Press displays the following options:
Option
Description
Preview *
q
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (supported flash
FV lock *
r
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed.
B
C
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer
expires.
AE lock
(Reset on
release) *
D
E
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
time or the standby timer expires.
AE lock
(Hold) *
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.
F
AF-ON *
Pressing the Fn button initiates autofocus.
A
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn
button is pressed.
Flash off
s
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure, flash, or ADL
bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutter-
release mode, all shots in the current bracketing
Bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter-release
1
burst
button is pressed. If white balance bracketing is active
or continuous release mode (mode CH or CL) is selected,
the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the
shutter-release button is held down.
Matrix
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
L
M
N
metering
Center-
weighted
metering
Spot
Center-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
button is pressed.
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
pressed.
metering
U
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
Fn button performs same function as K button. Select
when using a telephoto lens or in other circumstances
in which it is difficult to operate the K button with
your left hand.
Playback *
K
MY MENU * Pressing the Fn button displays “MY MENU”.
%
Access top
Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
item in MY MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
3
MENU *
frequently-used menu item.
Viewfinder
virtual
horizon *
Press the Fn button to view a virtual horizon display in
the viewfinder (see below).
!
No operation is performed when the Fn button is
pressed.
None
* This option can not be used in combination with Press + command dials
command dials to None. If another option is selected for Press +
command dials while this setting is active, Press will be set to None.
U
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Virtual Horizon
When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for f3 (Assign Fn
button) > Press, pressing the Fn button displays a pitch and roll
indicators in the viewfinder. Press the button a second time to clear the
indicators from display.
Roll
Camera tilted right
Camera level
Camera tilted left
Pitch
Camera tilted forward
Camera level
Camera tilted back
The roles of the pitch and roll indicators are reversed when the camera
is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation. Note that the
display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle
forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the amount of
tilt will not be displayed.
U
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Press + command dials
Selecting Press + command dials displays the following options:
Option
Description
Press the Fn button and
rotate a command dial to
choose from pre-selected
Selecting Choose image
area displays a list of image
areas; highlight options and
press 2to select or deselect, then highlight Done
and press J.
Choose
image area
i
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command
Shutter spd dial to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press the
& aperture Fn button and rotate the sub-command dial to lock
$
v
lock
information.
If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials
are rotated, changes to shutter speed (exposure
1 step spd/ modes f and h) and aperture (exposure modes g and
aperture
h) are made in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the
option selected for Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
CPU lens
number
Active
choose a lens number specified using the Non-CPU
Press the Fn button and rotate the command dials to
w
y
If this option is selected, the shooting menu bank can
be selected by pressing the Fn button and rotating a
command dial.
Shooting
menu bank
n
No operation is performed when the command dials
are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.
None
U
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f4: Assign Preview Button
Choose the role played by the Pv button,
either by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials). The options
available are the same as for Assign Fn
available for Press. The default options for Press and Press +
command dials are Preview and None, respectively.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f5: Assign Sub-selector
Choose whether the sub-selector 1, 3, 4,
and 2controls are used for focus point
perform the same role as the matching
controls on the multi selector (Same as multi
selector).
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f6: Assign Sub-selector Center
Choose the role played by the center of the
sub-selector, either by itself (Press) or when
used in combination with the command dials
(Press + command dials). The options
available are the same as for Assign Fn
additional Select center focus point option that allows the center
of the sub-selector to be used to select the center focus point and
that AF-ON, 1 stp spd/aperture, and Active D-Lighting are not
available. The default options for Press and Press + command
dials are AE/AF lock and None, respectively.
U
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f7: Assign Fn Button (Vert.)
Choose the role played by the Fn
button for vertical shooting, either
by itself (Press) or when used in
combination with the command
dials (Press + command dials). The
options available are the same as for
Press and that Press + command dials has additional ISO
sensitivity, Exposure mode, Exposure compensation, and
Metering options that allow the Fn button for vertical shooting
Press + command dials are respectively AE/AF lock and None.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f8: Shutter Spd & Aperture Lock
Selecting On for Shutter speed lock locks
shutter speed at the value currently selected
in mode f or h. Selecting On for Aperture
lock locks aperture at the value currently
selected in mode g or h. Shutter speed and
aperture lock are not available in mode e.
U
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f9: Assign BKT Button
Choose the role played by the D button. If
high dynamic range or multiple exposure is
active while another function is assigned to
the D button, the D button can not be
used until high dynamic range or multiple
exposure photography ends.
Option
Description
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the bracketing increment and number of shots
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the mode and number of shots for multiple
Auto
bracketing
t
$
Multiple
exposure
HDR (high
dynamic
range)
Press the t button and rotate a command dial to
choose the mode and the exposure differential
2
U
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f10: Customize Command Dials
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
Option
Description
Reverse the direction of rotation of the
command dials when they are used to
make adjustments to Exposure
Reverse compensation and/or Shutter speed/
rotation aperture. Highlight options and press
2to select or deselect, then highlight
Done and press J. This setting also
applies to the command dials for vertical shooting.
If Off is selected, the main command
dial controls shutter speed and the sub-
command dial controls aperture. If On
is selected, the main command dial will
Change
control aperture and the sub-command
main/sub
dial shutter speed. If On (Mode A) is
selected, the main command dial will
be used to set aperture in exposure mode g only. This setting
also applies to the command dials for vertical shooting.
If Sub-command dial is selected, aperture can only be
adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main
command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub). If
Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted with
the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will
show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G lenses
Aperture
setting
is still set using the sub-command dial). Note that regardless of
the setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
U
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Description
If Off is selected, the multi selector is used to choose the
picture displayed during full-frame playback, highlight
thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On or On (image review
excluded) is selected, the main command dial can be used to
choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback, move
the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback, and move
the menu highlight bar up or down. The sub-command dial is
used to display additional photo information in full-frame
playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail
playback. Select On (image review excluded) to prevent the
command dials from being used for playback during image
review. While menus are displayed, rotating the sub-
command dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected
option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To
make a selection, press 2, the center of the multi selector, or
J.
Menus
and
playback
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f11: Release Button to Use Dial
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by
holding the I (Q), E, D, M, Y, S, T, U, or AF-mode
button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released (this also applies to the
Fn and Pv buttons and the Fn button for vertical shooting, if they
have been assigned Active D-Lighting using Custom Setting f3,
again or the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Except
when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer,
setting will also end when the standby timer expires.
U
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f12: Slot Empty Release Lock
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be recorded
(they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode). If
Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f13: Reverse Indicators
If
(V) is selected, the exposure indicators in the
top control panel and information display are displayed with
positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select
(W) to display negative values on the left and
positive values on the right.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f14: Assign Multi Selector (Vert.)
Choose whether the 1, 3, 4, and 2controls on the multi selector
for vertical shooting are used for focus point selection (Focus
controls on the multi selector (Same as multi selector; note that in
this case, you can select Info42/Playback13for Photo info
playback to reverse the role of the buttons so that pressing 1or 3
displays additional images and pressing 4or 2changes the photo
information displayed). The role played by the center of the multi
selector for vertical shooting when Focus point selection is
chosen is that selected for Custom Setting f6 (Assign sub-selector
U
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f15: Playback Zoom
Choose the controls used for playback zoom.
Option
Description
u Use X and W
Press X to zoom in, W to zoom out.
Press either X or W and rotate the main command
dial right to zoom in, left to zoom out. Pressing
either button without rotating the command dial
has no effect.
v Use X/W + y
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
f16: Assign Movie Record Button
Choose the role played by the movie-record button when C is
selected with the live view selector.
Option
Description
Press the button and rotate a command dial to
ISO sensitivity
9
Choose image Press the button and rotate a command dial to
i
n
area
Shooting menu The shooting menu bank can be selected by pressing
bank
Press the button and rotate the main command dial
to lock shutter speed in modes f and h; press the
button and rotate the sub-command dial to lock
information.
Shutter spd &
aperture lock
$
No operation is performed if the command dials are
rotated while the button is pressed.
None
U
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
g: Movie
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g1: Assign Fn Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button during movie live view.
Option
Description
Aperture widens while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g2 (Assign
t
r
(open)
preview button) > Power aperture (close) for
button-controlled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
s
shooting info movie recording information. Press again to return
to the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.
U
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g2: Assign Preview Button
Choose the role played by the Pv button during movie live view.
Option
Description
Aperture narrows while the button is pressed. Use in
Power aperture combination with Custom Setting g1 (Assign Fn
q
r
(close)
button) > Power aperture (open) for button-
controlled aperture adjustment.
Press the button during movie recording to add an
used when viewing and editing movies.
Press the button to display information on shutter
View photo
speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
s
shooting info movie recording information. Press again to return
to the movie recording display.
None
Pressing the button has no effect.
A Power Aperture
Power aperture is available only in exposure modes g and h and can not
be used during movie recording or while photo shooting info is
displayed (A 6 icon indicates that power aperture can not be used).
The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
U
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g3: Assign Sub-selector Center
Choose the role played by the center of the sub-selector during
movie live view.
Option
Description
Press the control during movie recording to add an
used when viewing and editing movies.
r
Press the control to display information on shutter
View shooting speed, aperture, and other photo settings in place of
s
photo info
movie recording information. Press again to return to
the movie recording display.
AE/AF lock
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
B
C
AE lock only
Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed, and
AE lock (Hold) remains locked until the control is pressed a second
E
F
time or the standby timer expires.
AF lock only
None
Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Pressing the control has no effect.
U
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ A Custom Settings menu
g4: Assign Shutter Button
Choose the role played by pressing the shutter-release button
when 1 is selected with the live view selector.
Option
Description
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to
end movie recording and take a photograph with an
aspect ratio that matches that of a movie frame (for
information on image size, see page 71).
Take photos
C
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start
movie live view. You can then press the shutter-
release button halfway to focus and press it all the
way down to start or end recording. To end movie
live view, press the a button. The shutter-release
in the same way as the camera shutter-release
button.
Record movies
1
If the shutter-release button is pressed all the way
down during movie recording, the camera will
record a photograph without interrupting movie
recording. Photos are 1,920 × 1,080 pixels in size
Live frame grab (aspect ratio 16 : 9) and recorded at an image quality
of JPEG fine. Note that during movie recording,
x
photos are taken one at a time regardless of the
release mode selected; this restriction does not
apply if movie recording is not currently in progress.
A Record Movies
available and any functions assigned to the shutter release button (such
as taking photographs, measuring preset white balance, and taking
image dust-off reference photos) can not be used when 1 is selected
with the live view selector. Select Take photos or Live frame grab to
use these options.
U
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup
menu) tab.
G button
Option
Format memory card
0
Option
0
345 Network
345 Image comment
399 Copyright information
402 IPTC
346 Voice memo options
281 Save/load settings
348 GPS
348 Virtual horizon
349 Non-CPU lens data
350 AF fine-tune
Monitor brightness
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning *
Image Dust Off ref photo
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date
Language
Auto image rotation
Battery info
351 Firmware version
*
Not available when battery is low.
A See Also
Menu defaults are listed on page 417.
U
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Format Memory Card
To begin formatting, choose a memory card
slot and select Yes. Note that formatting
permanently deletes all pictures and other data
on the card in the selected slot. Before
formatting, be sure to make backup copies as
required.
D During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the O (Q) and I
G button ➜ B setup menu
Monitor Brightness
Adjust the brightness of the monitor for playback, menus, and the
information display.
Option
Description
When the monitor is on, monitor brightness is automatically
Auto adjusted according to ambient lighting conditions. Care should
Press 1or 3to choose monitor brightness. Choose higher
Manual values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced
brightness.
A See Also
For information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view, see
page 57.
U
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. A non-DX lens with a focal length of at
least 50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all
the way in.
1 Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the
following options and
press J. To exit without
acquiring image dust off
J button
data, press G.
• Start: The message
shown at right will be displayed and
“rEF” will appear in the viewfinder and
control panel displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select this
option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is
complete.
U
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3 Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
Step 1.
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor
cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start only if the
dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures. Reference images can not
be viewed using computer imaging software.
A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.
U
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Flicker Reduction
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting
under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting
during live view or movie recording. Choose
Auto to allow the camera to automatically
choose the correct frequency, or manually
match the frequency to that of the local AC
power supply.
D Flicker Reduction
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options
and choose the one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction
may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which
case you should try choosing a smaller aperture (higher f-number). To
prevent flicker, select mode and choose a shutter speed adapted to the
h
frequency of the local power supply: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, or 1/30 s for 60 Hz;
1/100 s, 1/50 s, or 1/25 s for 50 Hz.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Time Zone and Date
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically set
to the time in the new time zone.
Time zone
Date and time Set the camera clock.
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
displayed.
Date format
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock will
automatically be advanced or set back one hour. The
default setting is Off.
Daylight
saving time
B flashes in the top control panel when the clock is not set.
U
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
following options are available.
Czech
Danish
Russian
Romanian
Finnish
Swedish
Turkish
Ukrainian
Arabic
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Čeština
Dansk
Русский
Română
Suomi
German
English
Spanish
French
Indonesian
Italian
Dutch
Norwegian
Polish
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Indonesia
Italiano
Nederlands
Norsk
Svenska
Türkçe
Українська
Polski
Portuguese
Thai
Português
U
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically
orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose
this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens
pointing up or down.
A Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
U
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.
Item
Description
Charge The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note that
the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset
No. of
shots
white balance.
• j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is
required to ensure that battery level can be measured
Calibration
• —: Calibration not required.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates that
battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the battery has
reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced.
Battery Note that fresh batteries charged at temperatures under
age
about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in charging life;
the battery age display will however return to normal once
the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about
20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
U
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or
visible on the shooting data page in the photo information display
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2.
U
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Copyright Information
Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in
metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or in Capture NX 2 (available
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to all
subsequent photographs. Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing 2.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright
information option.
U
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
IPTC
The software needed to create IPTC presets and save them to a
memory card can be downloaded using the supplied ViewNX 2
installer CD (Internet connection required) and installed on your
computer (for more information see the software’s on-line help).
The memory card can then be inserted in the camera’s primary
card slot and the options in the IPTC menu used to copy presets to
the camera and embed them in new photographs as described
below:
• Copy to camera: Copy IPTC presets from
selected destination on the camera. The
camera can store up to ten presets. To copy
a preset, highlight it and press J, then
highlight a destination and press J again
(to preview the preset highlighted in the source list, press 2,
then press J after viewing the preset to proceed to the
destination list).
• Edit: Select a preset from the list of IPTC presets stored on the
camera and choose Rename to rename the preset or Edit IPTC
information to select fields and edit their contents as described
on page 180.
• Delete: Select a preset for deletion from the
camera. A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J to
reset the selected preset.
• Auto embed during shooting: Highlight
the camera IPTC preset that will be
embedded in all subsequent photographs
and press J (to disable embedding, select
Off).
U
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D IPTC Information
IPTC is a standard established by the International Press
Telecommunications Council (IPTC) with the intent of clarifying and
simplifying the information required when photographs are shared
with a variety of publications. The camera supports standard roman
alphanumeric characters only; other characters will not display correctly
18 characters long (if a longer name is created using a computer, all
characters after the eighteenth will be deleted); the number of
characters that may appear in each field is given below; any characters
over the limit will not be displayed.
Field
Caption
Event ID
Headline
Object name
City
State
Country
Category
Maximum length
2000
64
256
256
256
256
256
3
Field
Maximum length
Supplemental
Categories
(Supp. Cat.)
256
Byline
256
256
256
256
256
Byline title
Writer/editor
Credit
Source
U
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Save/Load Settings
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card, or to the memory card in the primary card slot if two memory
displayed). Use this option to share settings among D4 cameras.
Menu
Option
Playback display options
Image review
After delete
Playback
Rotate tall
Shooting menu bank
Extended menu banks
File naming
Primary slot selection
Secondary slot function
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
Shooting
(all banks)
White balance (with fine-tuning and presets d-1–d-4)
Set Picture Control; note that Standard is used for
Picture Controls other than the six preset Picture
Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral,
Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, and Landscape)
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Auto distortion control
Long exposure NR
U
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu
Option
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Live view photography
Movie settings
Shooting
(all banks)
Custom settings
(all banks)
All Custom Settings
Clean image sensor
HDMI
Flicker reduction
Time zone and date (excepting date and time)
Language
Auto image rotation
Image comment
Copyright information
IPTC
Setup
Voice memo options
GPS
Non-CPU lens data
All My Menu items
All recent settings
Choose tab
My Menu/
Recent Settings
Settings saved using the D4 can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a
memory card is inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings
option is only available if the card contains saved settings.
A Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP9. The camera will not be
able to load settings if the file name is changed.
U
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Virtual Horizon
Display roll and pitch information based on information from the
camera tilt sensor. If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the
roll reference line will turn green, while if the camera is tilted
neither forward nor back, the pitch reference line will turn green
and a dot will appear in the center of the display. Each division is
equivalent to 5°.
Camera level
Camera tilted left or
right
Camera tilted forward
or back
D Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the
amount of tilt will not be displayed.
A See Also
For information on viewing a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder,
information on displaying a virtual horizon in live view, see pages 58
U
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ B setup menu
AF Fine-Tune
Fine-tune focus for up to 20 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
Option
AF fine
tune
Description
• On: Turn AF tuning on.
• Off: Turn AF tuning off.
(On/Off)
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU
lenses only). Press or to choose
Saved a value between +20 and –20.
value Values for up to 20 lens types can be
stored. Only one value can be
Move focal
point away
from camera.
1
3
Current
value
stored for each type of lens.
Choose the AF tuning value used
when no previously saved value
exists for the current lens (CPU
Default
Move focal
Previous
point toward value
camera.
lenses only).
List previously saved AF tuning values. To delete a lens from the
list, highlight the desired lens and press ). To change a lens
O
(Q
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that
List
saved Saved value can be used with only one
values lens of each type), highlight the desired
lens and press
right will be displayed; press
choose an identifier and press
changes and exit.
2
. The menu shown at
or to
to save
1
3
J
U
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity
when AF tuning is applied.
D Live View
A Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.
G button ➜ B setup menu
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
U
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N (retouch
menu) tab.
G button
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or
retouched copies of existing pictures. The retouch menu is only
displayed when a memory card containing photographs is
inserted in the camera (note that if the memory card is being used
to store both RAW/NEF and JPEG copies of the same photographs
NEF (RAW) processing apply only to the JPEG copies).
Option
D-Lighting
Red-eye correction
Trim
Monochrome
Filter effects
Color balance
Image overlay 1
0
Option
NEF (RAW) processing
Resize
0
i
j
k
7
8
Z
Straighten
l
a
e
Distortion control
Perspective control
Edit movie
m
n
o
9
p
Side-by-side comparison 2
1 Can only be selected by pressing G and selecting N tab.
2 Can only be displayed by holding J and pressing 2in full-frame playback
when a retouched image or original is displayed.
U
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating Retouched Copies
To create a retouched copy:
1 Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1or 3to highlight an
item, 2to select.
2 Select a picture.
Highlight a picture and press J
(to view the highlighted picture
full screen, press and hold the X
button).
To view images in other locations, press
W and select the desired card and folder
A Retouch
The camera may not be able to display or
retouch images created with other devices.
3 Select retouch options.
For more information, see the section for the selected item. To
exit without creating a retouched copy, press G.
A Monitor off Delay
The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for a brief period. Any unsaved changes will be lost. To
increase the time the monitor remains on, choose a longer menu
U
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Create a retouched
copy.
Press J to create a
retouched copy.
Retouched copies are
indicated by a & icon.
J button
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback
Retouched copies can also be created during playback.
Display picture full
frame and hold Jand
press 2.
Highlight option and
Create retouched
copy.
press J.
D Retouching Copies
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and
Edit movie > Choose start/end point each option can be applied only
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
A Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim, Image overlay, NEF
(RAW) processing, and Resize, copies created from JPEG images are
the same size and quality as the original, copies created from NEF (RAW)
photos are saved as large fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created
from TIFF (RGB) photos are saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the
same size as the original. Size-priority compression is used when copies
are saved in JPEG format.
U
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
D-Lighting
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
After
Press 1or 3to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy
the photograph.
U
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash and is
available only with photographs taken using a flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and
create a copy as described in the following table. Note that
red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results
and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the
image that are not affected by red-eye; check the preview
thoroughly before proceeding.
To
Use
Description
Press X to zoom in, W to
zoom out. While photo is
Zoom in
X
zoomed in, use multi
selector to view areas of
image not visible in
Zoom out
W
monitor. Keep multi
selector pressed to scroll
View other
areas of image
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation
window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi
selector are pressed; area currently visible in
monitor is indicated by yellow border. Press J to
cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the selected
photograph, a copy will be created that has been
processed to reduce its effects. No copy will be
created if the camera is unable to detect red-eye.
Cancel zoom
Create copy
J
J
U
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
To
Reduce size of
crop
Use
Description
Press W to reduce the size of the crop.
W
Increase size of
crop
Press X to increase the size of the crop.
X
Rotate the main command dial to switch
between aspect ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4, 1 : 1,
and 16 : 9.
Change crop
aspect ratio
Use multi selector to position the crop. Press
and hold to move the crop rapidly to the
desired position.
Position crop
Press center of multi selector to preview
cropped image.
Preview crop
Create copy
Save the current crop as a separate file.
J
A Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF
(RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos have an
copies created from JPEG photos have the same
image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and
appears at upper left in the crop display.
A Viewing Cropped Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are
displayed.
U
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Monochrome
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1to increase color
saturation, 3to decrease. Press J
to create a monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Filter Effects
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight
filter, making the picture less
blue. The effect can be previewed
in the monitor as shown at right.
Skylight
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.
Warm filter
U
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below. The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
giving the distribution of tones in the copy.
Press J to copy the photograph.
Increase amount of green
Increase amount of blue
Increase amount of amber
Increase amount of magenta
A Zoom
To zoom in on the image displayed in the
monitor, press X. The histogram will be updated
to show data only for the portion of the image
displayed in the monitor. While the image is
zoomed in, press L (Z/Q) to toggle back and
forth between color balance and zoom. When
zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with
the X and W buttons and scroll the image with
the multi selector.
U
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than photographs combined in an
imaging application. The new picture is saved at current image
quality and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image
NEF (RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
+
1 Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay and
press 2. The dialog shown at
right will be displayed, with
Image 1 highlighted; press J
to display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
U
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select the first image.
Use the multi selector to
highlight the first photograph
in the overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X
button. To view images in other locations, press W and select
to select the highlighted photograph and return to the
preview display.
3 Select the second image.
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight Image 2
and press J, then select the second photo as described in
Step 2.
4 Adjust gain.
Highlight Image 1 or Image 2
and optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1or 3to
select the gain from values
between 0.1 and 2.0. Repeat
for the second image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to
halve gain or 2.0 to double it. The effects of gain are visible in
the Preview column.
U
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Preview the overlay.
Press 4or 2to place the
cursor in the Preview column
and press 1or 3to highlight
Overlay. Press J to preview
the overlay as shown at right
(to save the overlay without displaying a preview, select Save).
To return to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press
W.
6 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview
is displayed to save the
overlay. After an overlay is
created, the resulting
J button
image will be displayed
full-frame in the monitor.
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same image area and bit-depth
can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for
white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for
Image 1. The current image comment is appended to the overlay when
it is saved; copyright information and IPTC presets, however, are not
copied. Overlays saved in NEF (RAW) format use the compression
selected for Type in the NEF (RAW) recording menu and have the same
bit depth as the original images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-
priority compression.
U
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
NEF (RAW) Processing
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.
1 Select NEF (RAW)
processing.
Highlight NEF (RAW)
processing and press 2to
display a picture selection
dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images created with this camera.
2 Select a photograph.
Highlight a photograph (to
view the highlighted
photograph full frame, press
and hold the X button; to view
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and proceed to
the next step.
U
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance and
vignette control are not available with multiple exposures or
pictures created with image overlay and that exposure
compensation can only be set to values between –2 and
+2 EV. If Auto is selected for white balance, it will be set to
whichever of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors was in
effect when the picture was taken. The Picture Control grid is
not displayed when Picture Controls are adjusted.
4 Copy the photograph.
Highlight EXE and press J
to create a JPEG copy of
the selected photograph.
To exit without copying
J button
the photograph, press the
U
G button.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Resize
Create small copies of selected photographs.
1 Select Resize.
To resize selected images, press
G to display the menus and
select Resize in the retouch
menu.
2 Choose a destination.
If two memory cards are
inserted, you can choose a
destination for the resized
copies by highlighting Choose
destination and pressing 2(if
only one memory card is
inserted, proceed to Step 3).
The menu shown at right will be
displayed; highlight a card slot
and press J.
U
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Choose a size.
Highlight Choose size and
press 2.
The options shown at right will
be displayed; highlight an
option and press J.
4 Choose pictures.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
Highlight pictures and press the
center of the multi selector to
select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button; to
view pictures in other locations
marked by a 8 icon. Press J when the selection is complete.
Note that photographs taken at an image-area setting of 5 : 4
U
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will
be displayed. Highlight
Yes and press J to save
the resized copies.
J button
A Viewing Resized Copies
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
A Image Quality
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
photos have the same image quality as the original.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Straighten
Create a straightened copy of the selected
image. Press 2to rotate the image clockwise
by up to five degrees in increments of
approximately 0.25 degrees, 4to rotate it
counterclockwise (the effect can be
previewed in the edit display; note that edges
of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy). Press J to
copy the photograph, or press K to exit to playback without
creating a copy.
U
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Distortion Control
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera
correct distortion automatically and then
make fine adjustments using the multi
selector, or select Manual to reduce
distortion manually (note that Auto is not
available with photos taken using auto distortion control; see
pincushion distortion (the effect can be previewed in the edit
display; note that greater amounts of distortion control result in
more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to copy the
photograph, or press K to exit to playback without creating a
copy. Note that distortion control may heavily crop or distort the
edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at
image areas other than DX (24×16) 1.5×.
A Auto
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses (PC,
fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded). Results are not guaranteed
with other lenses.
U
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G button ➜ N retouch menu
Perspective Control
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object. Use the multi selector to adjust
perspective (note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the
edges being cropped out). The results can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the photograph, or
press K to exit to playback without creating a copy.
Before
After
Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by
pressing the J and 2buttons when a copy or original is displayed
full frame.
1 Select a picture.
Select a retouched copy
(shown by a & icon) or a
photograph that has been
retouched in full-frame
J button
playback and press the J
and 2buttons.
U
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press J.
3 Compare the copy with the
Options used to
create copy
original.
The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed
at the top of the display. Press
4or 2to switch between the
source image and the
Source Retouched
image
copy
retouched copy. To view the highlighted picture full frame,
press and hold the X button. If the copy was created from two
images using Image overlay, press 1or 3to view the other
source image. If multiple copies exist for the current source
image, press 1or 3to view the other copies. To exit to
playback, press the K button, or press J to exit to playback
with the highlighted image selected.
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
U
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
To display My Menu, press G and select the O (My Menu) tab.
G button
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described on the
following pages.
U
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Adding Options to My Menu
1 Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired
menu item and press J.
J button
4 Position the new item.
Press 1or 3to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.
5 Add more items.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon can not be
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
U
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Deleting Options from My Menu
1 Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2 Select items.
Highlight items and press 2to
select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.
3 Select Done.
Highlight Done and press
J. A confirmation dialog
will be displayed.
J button
4 Delete the selected items.
Press J to delete the selected
items.
A Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O (Q)
button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q) again to
remove the selected item from My Menu.
U
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Reordering Options in My Menu
1 Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you
wish to move and press J.
J button
3 Position the item.
Press 1or 3to move the item
up or down in My Menu and
press J. Repeat Steps 2–3 to
reposition additional items.
4 Exit to My Menu.
G button
Press the G button to
return to My Menu.
U
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select m Recent
settings for O My Menu > Choose tab.
1 Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.
2 Select m Recent
settings.
Highlight m Recent
settings and press J. The
name of the menu will
change from “MY MENU”
J button
to “RECENT SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select O My Menu for
m Recent settings > Choose tab.
A Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and press
the O (Q) button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O (Q)
again to delete the selected item.
U
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
n
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
Exposure
mode
Focus mode
Metering system
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
L
M
e
f
g
h
AF
M
N
3D Color
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF NIKKOR2
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR
PC-E NIKKOR series
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D4
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter7
Other AF NIKKOR
(except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
AI-, AI-modified, NIKKOR
or Nikon Series E lenses12
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm
f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
PC-NIKKOR
AI-type Teleconverter18
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment19
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
5
5
5
5
3,5
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
5
6
3,5
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
9
9
3
3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
10
—
—
✔
10
14
15
✔
— ✔13
✔
—
✔
✔
— ✔16
—
—
—
15
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
— ✔13
— ✔17
— ✔13
—
—
—
—
—
✔
5
✔
✔
15
8
14
✔
✔
✔
8
—
✔
✔
— ✔20
—
—
—
✔
✔
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or 13;
PN-11)
8
—
✔
✔
— ✔13
—
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used.
2 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
n
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than
the maximum aperture is used.
5 Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
6 Manual exposure mode only.
focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see page 387.
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF
35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens
at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
12 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body.
Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
value will be displayed in viewfinder and top control panel.
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
results are not achieved.
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
16 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than flash
sync speed by one step or more.
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock and shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI
35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See
teleconverter manual for details.
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
20 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking
photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO sensitivities.
Use manual focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at high ISO sensitivities
when aperture is adjusted during movie recording or live view photography.
n
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Recognizing CPU and Type G and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended, but note that
IX-NIKKOR lenses can not be used. CPU lenses can be identified by the
presence of CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens
barrel. Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and
AF-I lenses:
• AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II • AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm
f/2.8G IF-ED 1
• AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II 2 • AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2
• AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/2.8G ED VR II
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2
• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
1 Autofocus not supported.
2 Autofocus and electronic
rangefinding support focus
points shown at right when
TC-20E II/
TC-20E III
TC-17E II
used with TC-17E II, TC-20E II, or TC-20E III AF-S teleconverters. When used
with TC-20E II/TC-20E III, focus data for focus points other than the center focus
point are obtained from line sensors. Single point AF is used when 3D-
combined apertures slower than f/5.6, the camera may not be able to focus on
dark or low-contrast subjects.
n
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
When using non-CPU lenses and accessories, select exposure mode g or
h and set aperture using the lens aperture ring. In other modes, the
enable many of the features available with CPU lenses, including color
matrix metering; if no data are provided, center-weighted metering will
be used in place of color matrix metering, while if the maximum
aperture is not provided, the camera aperture display will show the
number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value
must be read off the lens aperture ring.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following can NOT be used with the D4:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900
or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing
unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers • Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
n
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Calculating Angle of View
The D4 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm (135) format cameras.
angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film (36.0 × 23.9 mm);
if a DX lens is attached, the angle of view will automatically be adjusted
to 23.4 × 15.5 mm (DX format).
To choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens, turn
Auto DX crop off and select from FX (36×24), 1.2× (30×20),
DX (24×16), and 5 : 4 (30×24). If a 35 mm format lens is attached, the
angle of view could be reduced by 1.5 × by selecting DX (24×16) or by
1.2 × by selecting 1.2× (30×20), to expose a smaller area, or the aspect
ratio could be changed by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24).
FX (36×24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,
equivalent to 35 mm format camera)
1.2× (30×20) picture size
(29.9 × 19.9 mm)
DX (24×16) picture size
(23.4 × 15.5 mm, equivalent to DX
format camera)
5 : 4 (30×24) picture size
Lens
(29.9 × 23.9 mm)
Picture diagonal
Angle of view (FX (36×24);
35 mm format)
Angle of view (1.2× (30×20))
Angle of view (DX (24×16); DX format)
Angle of view (5 : 4 (30×24))
n
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Calculating Angle of View (Continued)
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the 35 mm
format angle of view, while the 1.2× (30×20) angle of view is about 1.2
times smaller and the 5 : 4 (30×24) angle of view is about 1.1 times
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35 mm format when
DX (24×16) is selected, multiply the focal length of the lens by about
1.5, by about 1.2 when is 1.2× (30×20) selected, or by about 1.1 when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected (for example, the effective focal length of a
50mm lens in 35 mm format would be 75 mm when DX (24×16) is
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, or 55 mm when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected).
n
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the D4.
EN-EL18 batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon service representatives. These batteries can be
recharged and calibrated using an MH-26 battery charger.
recharge and calibrate EN-EL18 batteries.
Power sources
• Power Connector EP-6, AC Adapter EH-6b: These accessories can
be used to power the camera for extended periods (EH-6
AC adapters can also be used). The EP-6 is required to
• Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage.
The camera can also be controlled from any computer on
the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent
power source in the form of an optional EH-6b AC adapter
or EN-EL3e battery. See the WT-4 manual for details.
• Wireless Transmitter WT-5:Connect the WT-5 to the camera’s
peripheral connector to upload pictures over a wireless
network, to control the camera from a computer running
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), or to take and
browse pictures remotely from a computer or iPhone. See
the WT-5 manual for details.
Wireless LAN
adapters
Note: A wireless network and some basic network knowledge is
required when using a wireless transmitter. Be sure to upgrade
the software supplied with the wireless transmitter to the
latest version.
n
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Rubber Eyecup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens DK-17C: To accommodate
individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses are
available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2 m–1. Use
diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus can
not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved. The DK-17C is equipped with a safety lock.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M: The DK-17M magnifies the view
through the viewfinder by approximately 1.2 × for greater
precision when framing. The DK-17M is equipped with a
safety lock.
• Eyepiece Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene at the
center of the viewfinder for more accurate focus. DK-18
eyepiece adapter (available separately) required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing
attachment to the D4.
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
•
Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14/Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-17A:
These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or
cold conditions. The DK-17A is equipped with a safety
lock.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/Right-Angle Viewing
Attachment DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4 attach to the
viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle, allowing the image in
the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera
is in the horizontal shooting position. The DR-5 supports
diopter adjustment and can also magnify the view
through the viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when
framing (note that the edges of the frame will not be
visible when the view is magnified).
n
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Filters intended for special-effects photography may
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.
• The D4 can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use
the C-PL or C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead.
• Use NC filters to protect the lens.
• To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
Filters
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for
details.
PC Card Adapter EC-AD1: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in
PCMCIA card slots.
PC card
adapters
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package with such
advanced editing features as selection control points and
an auto retouch brush.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the computer
hard disk.
Software
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software; see the websites
operating systems. At default settings, Nikon Message Center 2
will periodically check for updates to Nikon software and
firmware while you are logged in to an account on the
computer and the computer is connected to the Internet. A
message is automatically displayed when an update is found.
n
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror,
viewfinder screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a
lens is not in place.
Body caps
remote control and automatic photography. The terminal is
provided with a cap, which protects the contacts when the
terminal is not in use. The following accessories can be used
(all lengths are approximate):
• Remote Cord MC-22:Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,
and black terminals for connection to a remote shutter-
triggering device, allowing control via sound or electronic
signals (length 1 m/3 ft 3 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-30: Remote shutter release; can be used to
reduce camera shake (length 80 cm/2 ft 7 in.).
• Remote Cord MC-36: Remote shutter release; can be used for
interval timer photography or to reduce camera shake or
keep the shutter open during a time exposure (length
85 cm/2 ft 9 in.).
Remote
terminal
accessories
• Extension Cord MC-21: Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series
20, 22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can be used at a
time (length 3 m/9 ft 10 in.).
• Connecting Cord MC-23: Connects two cameras for
simultaneous operation (length 40 cm/1 ft 4 in.).
• Adapter Cord MC-25: Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for
connection to devices with two-pin terminals, including
the MW-2 radio control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and
ML-2 modulite control set (length 20 cm/8 in.).
and UTC time with pictures.
via PC cable supplied by manufacturer of GPS device
(length 35 cm/1 ft 2 in.).
• Modulite Remote Control Set ML-3: Allows infrared remote
control at ranges of up to 8 m (26 ft 3 in.).
n
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stereo Microphone ME-1: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound while reducing the
noise caused by lens vibration being recorded with movies
Microphones
A The UF-2 Connector Cover for Stereo Mini-Plug Cables
The camera comes with a UF-2 connector cover for the stereo mini-plug
cable connecting the ME-1 to the camera being accidentally
disconnected. The cover attaches as shown.
n
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Attaching a Power Connector and AC
Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector
and AC adapter.
1 Remove the battery-chamber cover.
Lift the battery-chamber cover latch, turn
it to the open (A) position (q), and
remove the BL-6 battery-chamber cover
(w).
2 Connect the AC adapter.
Pass the DC cable over the power
connector cable guide (q) and slide it
down until it is at the bottom of the slot,
and then insert the DC plug into the DC IN
connector (w).
3 Insert the power connector.
Fully insert the power connector into the
battery chamber as shown.
n
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Latch the power
connector.
Rotate the latch to the closed
position (q) and fold it down
as shown (w). To prevent the
power connector being dislodged during operation, be sure
that it is securely latched.
The battery level is not displayed in the top control panel while
the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power
connector.
n
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove
the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the terminal cover in
place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area. Do not store your camera with naphtha or
camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
Camera
body
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under
warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
Lens,
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
Monitor
could result in damage or malfunction.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
n
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu. The
filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option, or
cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1 Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective
when the camera is placed base down as
shown at right.
2 Select Clean image
sensor in the setup
menu.
G button
Press G to display the
menus. Highlight Clean
image sensor in the setup
menu and press 2.
n
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and
press J.
The camera will check the
image sensor and then
begin cleaning. This
J button
process takes about 7
seconds; during this time,
1 flashes in the top
control panel and other
operations can not be
performed. Do not remove
or disconnect the power
source until cleaning is
complete and 1 is no
longer displayed.
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time
the camera is turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during
shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
5
6
7
Clean at startup
Clean at
shutdown
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup
& shutdown
and at shutdown.
Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
n
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and
press J.
J button
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor cleaning.
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low-pass filter. If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
the image sensor manually (see below) or consult a Nikon-authorized
service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
n
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter. Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged EN-EL18 battery or connect an optional EP-6
power connector and EH-6b AC adapter.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3 Select Lock mirror up
G button
for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and
press the G button to
display the menus.
Highlight Lock mirror up
for cleaning in the setup menu and press 2(note that this
option is not available at battery levels of J or below).
n
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the top control
panel and viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the low-
pass filter, turn the camera off.
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will
turn off and the row of dashes in the top control panel will
flash.
6 Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 8.
n
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower. Do not use a blower-brush,
as the bristles could damage the filter.
Dirt that can not be removed with a
blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe
the filter.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
D Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning
or inspection immediately.
n
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping. The D4, however, is designed to be used with interchangeable
lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are
removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign matter may
adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken
under certain conditions. To protect the camera when no lens is in place,
be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera, being careful
to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to
the body cap. Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on
the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately;
393) or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
n
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life
of about two years. If the B icon is displayed in the top control
panel while the standby timer is on, the battery is running low and
needs to be replaced. When the battery is exhausted, the B icon
will flash while the exposure meters are on. Photographs can still
be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time and date.
Replace the battery as described below.
1 Remove the main battery.
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main
battery chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL18
battery.
2 Open the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
toward the front of the main battery
chamber.
3 Remove the clock battery.
4 Insert the replacement battery.
Insert a new CR1616 lithium battery so
that the positive side (the side marked
with “+” and the battery name) is visible.
n
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Close the clock battery chamber.
Slide the clock battery chamber cover
towards the back of the main battery
chamber until it clicks into place.
6 Replace the main battery.
Reinsert the EN-EL18.
7 Set the camera clock.
Set the camera to the current date and
been set, the B icon will flash in the top
control panel.
ACAUTION
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could
cause an explosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.
D Inserting the Clock Battery
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery
incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could
damage the camera.
n
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if immersed
in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the internal
mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such as
those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day,
can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place
the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden
changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or
magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun
or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light may
cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in
photographs.
n
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily
damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the
curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents
from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-
ventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
n
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while
images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in these
circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory
or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is
connected.
Dry the accessory shoe cover: If the camera is used in the rain, water may
penetrate the supplied BS-2 accessory shoe cover. Remove and dry the
accessory shoe cover after using the camera in the rain.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels
that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not
a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching
the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
Batteries: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when handling batteries:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that
it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some time,
insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera
for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an
ambient temperature of 15 to 25 °C (59 to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely
cold locations). Repeat this process at least once every six months.
n
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when
used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new EN-EL18 battery.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare EN-EL18 battery and keep it fully charged.
Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement
batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of
batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before
taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a
warm place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold
battery may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
n
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defaults
The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed
❚❚Playback Menu Defaults
Option
Default
NC_D4
Off
Show next
On
Still images and movies
2 s
On
❚❚Shooting Menu Defaults 1
Option
Default
Off
DSC
XQD card slot
Overflow
JPEG normal
Large
Type
NEF (RAW) bit depth
On
FX (36×24)
Size priority
Lossless compressed
14-bit
Auto > Normal
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K
d-1
Standard
n
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Default
sRGB
Off
Off
Auto
Normal
Normal
Off
Off
Normal
100
Off
Off
2
On
Reset 3
Quiet
Reset 4
1920 × 1080; 30 fps
High quality
Auto sensitivity
XQD card slot
200 to 12800
With the exceptions of Extended menu banks, Multiple exposure,
Interval timer shooting, and Time-lapse photography, only settings
in the current shooting menu bank will be reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Shooting menu reset is not available while
shooting is in progress.
3 Applies to all banks. Start time reset to Now, interval reset to 1 minute,
number of intervals and number of shots reset to 1, and Start set to Off.
Shooting ends when reset is performed.
4 Applies to all banks. Interval reset to 5 s, recording time to 25 minutes.
n
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Custom Settings Menu Defaults *
Option
Default
Release
Focus
3 (Normal)
Shutter/AF-ON
Manual focus mode
On
On
Continuous mode
Focus point brightness
Dynamic-area AF display
Normal
Off
Matrix metering
No wrap
51 points
AF-ON
AF-ON
No
1/3 step
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
Center-weighted metering
Spot metering
Off
6 s
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
10 s
1
Interval between shots
0.5 s
n
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Playback
Default
10 s
20 s
Menus
Information display
10 s
Image review
4 s
Live view
10 min
Volume
Off
Pitch
High
Continuous high-speed
Continuous low-speed
Rear control panel
10 fps
5 fps
200
Off
On
Off
ISO sensitivity
Frame count
On
Auto
Off
1/250 s
1/60 s
TTL
Entire frame
On
Viewfinder display
Shooting mode
AE & flash
Flash/speed
MTR > under > over
Select center focus point
Thumbnail on/off
Playback mode
Live view
Select center focus point
n
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Default
Do nothing
None
Press
Press + command dials
Press
Press + command dials
Press
Press + command dials
Shutter speed lock
Choose image area
Preview
None
Focus point selection
AE/AF lock
None
AE/AF lock
None
Off
Off
Aperture lock
Auto bracketing
Exposure compensation: U
Shutter speed/aperture: U
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Aperture setting
Menus and playback
Off
Sub-command dial
Off
Press + command dials
No
Enable release
Same as multi selector
Use X and W
None
None
Press
n
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option
Press
Default
Index marking
Press
AE/AF lock
Take photos
* Defaults for the current Custom Settings bank can be restored using
❚❚Setup Menu Defaults
Option
Manual
Default
Manual
0
Clean at startup & shutdown
Auto
Output resolution
Advanced
Output range
Output display size
Auto
95%
On
Live view on-screen display
Daylight saving time
Auto
Off
On
Off
Disable
Press and hold
Speaker/headphones
Standby timer
Use GPS to set camera clock
Enable
Yes
n
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure Program
the following graph:
ISO 100; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G)
f/1
f/1.4
f/2
f/2.8
f/4
f/5.6
f/8
f/11
f/16
f/22
f/32
4" 2" 1" 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 1/8000
8"
30" 15"
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity;
the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent.
When matrix metering is used, values over 16 1/3 EV are reduced to
16 1/3 EV.
n
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon
representative.
❚❚Display
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional diopter
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2
Displays in control panels or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response
times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
A If the Camera Stops Responding
In extremely rare instances, the displays may not respond as expected
and the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon
is caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove
and replace the battery, taking care to avoid burns, and turn the camera
on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. If
the problem persists, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service
representative.
n
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Release locked is selected for Custom Setting f12 (Slot empty release
• CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest
f-number. If B is displayed in the top control panel, select Aperture
ring for Custom Setting f10 (Customize command dials) > Aperture
• Exposure mode f selected with A selected for shutter speed
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom Setting
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
Photos are out of focus:
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus lock
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
compatible flash units, choose 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in
Can not select focus point:
• Auto-area or face-priority AF selected for AF-area mode; choose another
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
n
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flicker or banding appear during live view or movie recording: Choose an option for
Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power
Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording: A flashing sign, flash, or
other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie
recording.
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines, or reddish areas) appears in
photos:
• To reduce randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines, choose lower ISO
• To reduce bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog at shutter
speeds slower than 1 s or to reduce reddish areas and other artifacts in
• Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise
Photos are blotched or smeared:
• Clean lens.
Colors are unnatural:
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not created
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image quality
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose exposure mode e, f, or g
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie
n
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF +
Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback: Select All for
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG
print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;
Can not print photos: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos can not be printed by direct
USB connection. Use DPOF print service (TIFF images only), create JPEG
print using ViewNX 2 (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
n
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter. Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can
not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party software
does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting, or vignette
control. Use ViewNX 2 (supplied) or optional Nikon software such as
Capture NX 2 (available separately).
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or transfer
❚❚Miscellaneous
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
n
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, top control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control View-
panel finder
Problem
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Solution
Set ring to minimum
aperture (highest
f-number).
0
B
(flashes)
Ready a fully-charged
spare battery.
H
d
Low battery.
• Battery exhausted.
• Recharge or replace
battery.
• Battery can not be
used.
• Contact Nikon-
authorized service
representative.
• An extremely
exhausted
• Replace the battery,
or recharge the
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery is exhausted.
d
(flashes)
H
(flashes)
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a third-
party battery is
inserted in the
camera.
—
• High battery
temperature.
• Remove battery and
wait for it to cool.
B
—
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.
(flashes)
n
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Control View-
panel finder
Problem
Solution
0
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
maximum aperture.
Aperture shown in
stops from maximum
aperture.
Aperture value will be
displayed if maximum
aperture is specified.
F
2 4 Camera unable to focus Change composition or
—
(flashes) using autofocus.
focus manually.
• Use a lower ISO
sensitivity.
• Use optional ND filter.
In exposure mode:
f Increase shutter
speed
g Choose a smaller
aperture (higher
f-number)
• Use a higher ISO
sensitivity.
• Use optional flash. In
exposure mode:
f Lower shutter
speed
Subject too bright;
photo will be
overexposed.
(Exposure
indicators and
shutter speed
or aperture
display flash)
Subject too dark; photo
will be underexposed.
g Choose a larger
aperture (lower
f-number)
Change shutter speed
or select manual
exposure mode.
Wait until processing is
complete.
A
(flashes)
A selected in
exposure mode f.
1
k
Processing in progress.
—
(flashes) (flashes)
n
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Control View-
panel finder
Problem
Solution
0
If indicator flashes for Check photo in
c
3s after flash fires,
monitor; if
underexposed, adjust
settings and try again.
—
(flashes) photo may be
underexposed.
Flash unit that does not
support red-eye
reduction attached and
flash sync mode set to
red-eye reduction.
Change flash sync
mode or use flash unit
that supports red-eye
reduction.
Y
—
(flashes)
• Reduce quality or
size.
• Delete photographs
after copying
important images to
computer or other
device.
Memory insufficient to
record further photos
at current settings, or
camera has run out of
file or folder numbers.
n
i/j
(flashes)
j
(flashes)
• Insert new memory
card.
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears
—
O
(flashes)
Camera malfunction. frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
A The i and j Icons
These icons flash to show the card affected.
n
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Control
panel
Monitor
Problem
Solution
0
Camera cannot
Turn camera off and
No memory card.
S
detect memory confirm that card is
card. correctly inserted.
• Error accessing • Use Nikon-
memory card. approved card.
—
• Check that contacts
are clean. If card is
damaged, contact
retailer or Nikon
This memory
card cannot be
used.
Card may be
damaged.
Insert
W,
R
representative.
i/j
(flashes)
new folder.
new memory card
after copying
another card.
important images
to computer or
other device.
Memory card has
This card is not
formatted.
Format the card.
Format memory card
card.
[C] not been
(flashes) formatted for use
in camera.
Failed to update
flash unit
firmware.
Flash cannot be
used.
Contact a Nikon-
authorized
service
Firmware for flash
unit mounted on
camera was not
updated correctly.
Contact a Nikon-
—
authorized service
representative.
—
representative.
n
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Control
panel
Monitor
Problem
The internal
temperature of
the camera is
high.
Solution
0
Wait for the internal
circuits to cool before
resuming live view or
movie recording.
Select folder
Unable to start
live view. Please
wait.
—
No images on
containing images
Folder contains
no images.
memory card or in from Playback folder
folder(s) selected menu or insert
—
for playback.
memory card
containing images.
No images can be
played back until
another folder has
All photos in
All images are
hidden.
—
—
hidden.
image used to allow
at least one image to
be displayed.
File has been
created or
modified using a
computer or
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
Cannot display
this file.
File can not be played
back on camera.
—
Selected image Images created with
Cannot select
this file.
—
—
can not be
retouched.
be retouched.
Check printer. To
resume, select
Continue (if
Check printer.
Printer error.
272 *
available).
n
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Indicator
Control
panel
Monitor
Problem
Solution
0
Paper in printer is Insert paper ofcorrect
Check paper.
Paper jam.
—
—
—
not of selected
size.
size and select
Continue.
272 *
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select
272 *
272 *
in printer.
Continue.
Insert paper of
selected size and
select Continue.
Check ink. To resume,
select Continue.
Replace ink and select
Continue.
Printer is out of
paper.
Out of paper.
Check ink supply.
Out of ink.
—
—
Ink error.
272 *
272 *
Printer is out of
ink.
* See printer manual for more information.
n
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
❚❚Nikon D4 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Lens mount
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
16.2 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
16.6 million
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(requires optional Capture NX 2 software)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
• FX (36×24) image area
4,928×3,280 (#) 3,696×2,456 ($) 2,464×1,640 (%)
• 1.2× (30×20) image area
4,096×2,720 (#) 3,072×2,040 ($) 2,048×1,360 (%)
• DX (24×16) image area
3,200×2,128 (#) 2,400×1,592 ($) 1,600×1,064 (%)
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
4,096×3,280 (#) 3,072×2,456 ($) 2,048×1,640 (%)
• FX-format photographs taken in movie live view (16:9)
4,928×2,768 (#) 3,696×2,072 ($) 2,464×1,384 (%)
• DX-format photographs taken in movie live view (16:9)
3,200×1,792 (#) 2,400×1,344 ($) 1,600×896 (%)
• FX-format photographs taken in movie live view (3:2)
4,928×3,280 (#) 3,696×2,456 ($) 2,464×1,640 (%)
• DX-format photographs taken in movie live view (3:2)
3,200×2,128 (#) 2,400×1,592 ($) 1,600×1,064 (%)
Note: A DX-based format is used for photographs taken
using the DX (24 × 16) 1.5× image area; an FX-based
format is used for all other photographs.
n
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
File format
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both
NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Picture Control System Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,
Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape; selected Picture
Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture
Controls
Media
XQD and Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA
compliant)
Dual card slots
Either card can be used for primary or backup storage
or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images;
pictures can be copied between cards.
File system
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) 2.3, PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage
•
FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical
• 1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
• DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical
• 5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical
Magnification
Eyepoint
Approx. 0.7 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1
)
18 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of viewfinder
eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
–3–+1 m–1
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen with AF
area brackets and framing grid
n
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewfinder
Reflex mirror
Quick return
Depth-of-field preview When Pv button is pressed, lens aperture is stopped
down to value selected by user (g and h modes) or by
camera (e and f modes)
Lens aperture
Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including type G
and D lenses (some restrictions apply to PC Micro-
NIKKOR lenses) and DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16 1.5×
image area), AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU AI
lenses (exposure modes g and h only). IX NIKKOR
lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI lenses can
not be used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with lenses
that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (the
electronic rangefinder supports the 11 focus points
with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or
faster).
Shutter
Type
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane
shutter
Speed
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250
Flash sync speed
X=1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or slower
Release
Release mode
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), J (quiet shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
Approximate frame
advance rate
Up to 10 fps (CL) or 10–11 fps (CH)
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2,
or 3 s
n
432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exposure
Metering
TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels
Metering method
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G and D
lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses);
color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses
if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle
in center of frame. Diameter of circle can be changed
to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle or average of entire frame)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center focus
point when non-CPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Matrix or center-weighted metering: –1–+20 EV
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Exposure mode Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutter-
priority auto (f); aperture-priority auto (g); manual (h)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Exposure bracketing
Flash bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
White balance
bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
ADL bracketing
2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3–5
frames using preset values for all frames
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with the center of
the sub-selector
ISO sensitivity
(Recommended
Exposure Index)
ISO 100 – 12800 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be
set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent)
below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, 2, 3, or 4 EV
(ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO 12800; auto ISO
sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high +2/+1, High,
Normal, Low, or Off
n
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Focus
Autofocus
Nikon Advanced Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus sensor
module with TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 51
focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8
supported by 11 sensors)
Detection range
Lens servo
–2 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo autofocus (AF-S);
continuous-servo autofocus (AF-C); predictive focus
tracking automatically activated according to subject
status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
Focus point
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
AF-area mode
Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 51- point dynamic-area AF,
3D-tracking, auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo autofocus) or by pressing the
center of the sub-selector
Flash
Flash control
TTL: i-TTL flash control using RGB sensor with
approximately 91K (91,000) pixels is available with
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, or SB-400; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with matrix
and center-weighting metering, standard i-TTL flash
for digital SLR with spot metering
Flash mode
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync, slow rear-
curtain sync, Auto FP High-Speed Sync supported
Flash compensation
Flash-ready indicator
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and
safety lock
n
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with SB-910,
System (CLS)
SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master flash, and SB-600
or SB-R200 as remotes, or SU-800 as commander; Auto
FP High-Speed Sync and modeling illumination
supported with all CLS-compatible flash units except
SB-400; Flash Color Information Communication and
FV lock supported with all CLS-compatible flash units
Sync terminal
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
White balance
White balance
Auto (2 types), incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 4
values can be stored), choose color temperature
(2500 K–10000 K), all with fine-tuning.
Live view
Modes
Live view photography (quiet or silent), movie live view
Lens servo
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo autofocus (AF-S); full-time
servo autofocus (AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)
AF-area mode
Autofocus
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF, subject-
tracking AF
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera selects
focus point automatically when face-priority AF or
subject-tracking AF is selected)
Movie
Metering
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor
Frame size (pixels) and • 1,920 × 1,080; 30 p (progressive), 25 p, 24 p
frame rate
• 1,920 × 1,080 crop; 30 p, 25 p, 24 p
• 1,280 × 720; 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p
• 640 × 424; 30p, 25p
Actual frame rates for 60 p, 50 p, 30 p, 25 p, and 24 p are
59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively; all
options support both ★ high and normal image
quality
n
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Movie
File format
Video compression
MOV
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Audio recording format Linear PCM
Audio recording device Built-in monaural or external stereo microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
ISO sensitivity
Other options
Automatically adjusted in the range ISO 200–12800 or
ISO 200–Hi 4
Index marking, time-lapse photography
Monitor
Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 921k-dot (VGA) TFT LCD with
170 ° viewing angle, approximately 100% frame
coverage, and automatic monitor brightness control
using ambient brightness sensor
Playback
Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images) playback
with playback zoom, movie playback, photo and/or
movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights,
photo information, GPS data display, auto image
rotation, voice memo input and playback, and IPTC
information embedding and display
Interface
USB
Hi-Speed USB
HDMI output
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; can be used
simultaneously with camera monitor
Audio input
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in power
supported)
Audio output
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Ten-pin remote terminal Can be used to connect optional remote control, GP-1
GPS unit, or GPS device compliant with NMEA0183
version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires optional MC-35 GPS
adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9-pin connector)
Ethernet
RJ-45 connector
For WT-5
Peripheral connector
n
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Supported languages
Supported languages
Arabic, Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Czech,
Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German,
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Spanish,
Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian
Power source
Battery
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL18 battery
AC adapter
EH-6b AC adapter; requires EP-6 power connector
(available separately)
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 156.5 × 90.5 mm (6.3 × 6.2 × 3.6 in.)
Weight
Approx. 1340 g (2 lb. 15.3 oz.) with battery and XQD
memory card but without body cap and accessory
shoe cover; approx. 1180 g/2 lb. 9.6 oz. (camera body
only)
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged
battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes
that this manual may contain.
n
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MH-26 battery charger
Rated input
AC 100 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Charging output
Applicable batteries
DC 12.6 V/1.2 A
Nikon EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time per
battery
Approx. 2 hours and 20 minutes at ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 160 × 85 × 50.5 mm (6.3 × 3.3 × 2 in.)
Length of power cable Approx. 1.8 m/6 ft (U.S.A. and Canada) or 1.5 m/4.9 ft
(other countries)
Weight
Approx. 265 g (9.3 oz), excluding power cable
EN-EL18 rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
10.8 V/2,000 mAh
Rated capacity
Operating temperature 0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 56.5 × 27 × 82.5 mm (2.2 × 1.1 × 3.2 in.)
Weight
Approx. 160 g (5.6 oz), excluding terminal cover
n
438
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard
that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the
memory card.
• Exif version 2.3: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-
compliant devices via a single cable connection.
A Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple
Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows and
Windows Vista are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. XQD
is a trademark of Sony Corporation. CompactFlash is a trademark of
SanDisk Corporation. HDMI, the
logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC. PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names
mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with
your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
n
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibrating Batteries
The MH-26 battery charger is equipped with a battery calibration
feature. Calibrate the battery as required to ensure the accuracy of
the camera and charger battery level displays.
If the calibration lamp for the current
Chamber
lamps (green)
battery chamber flashes when a
battery is inserted, the battery needs
to be calibrated. To begin
calibration, press the calibration
button for the current chamber for
about a second. The time needed to
calibrate the battery is shown by the
charge and calibration lamps:
Charge lamps
(green)
Calibration
lamps (yellow)
Calibration
buttons
Charge lamps
4 h
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (off)
Approximate time needed Calibration
to recalibrate battery
Over 6 hours
4 – 6 hours
lamp
2 h
6 h
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (glows)
K (off)
K (glows)
K (off)
K (off)
K (off)
2 – 4 hours
Under 2 hours
K (off)
When calibration is complete, the calibration and charge lamps will
turn off and charging will begin immediately.
Although calibration is recommended for accurate measurement
of battery charge state, calibration need not be performed when
the calibration lamp flashes. Once begun, calibration can be
interrupted as desired.
• If the calibration button is not pressed while the calibration lamp
is flashing, normal charging will begin after about ten seconds.
• To interrupt calibration, press the calibration button again.
Calibration will end and charging will begin.
n
440
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Battery Warning
If the chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when
no battery is inserted, there is a problem with the charger. If the
chamber and calibration lamps flash on and off in sequence when a
battery is inserted, a problem has occurred with the battery or charger
during charging. Remove the battery, unplug the charger, and take the
battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative for
inspection.
A Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries
The MH-26 charges only one battery at a time. If batteries are inserted in
both chambers, they will be charged in the order inserted. If the
calibration button for the first battery is pressed, the second battery can
not be calibrated or charged until calibration and charging of the first
battery are complete.
n
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approved Memory Cards
The camera accepts the XQD and CompactFlash memory cards
listed in the following sections. Other cards have not been tested.
For more details on the cards listed below, please contact the
manufacturer.
❚❚XQD Memory Cards
The following XQD memory cards have been tested and approved
for use in the camera.
QD-H16 16 GB
QD-H32 32 GB
Sony
H series
n
442
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚CompactFlash Memory Cards
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been
tested and approved for use in the camera. Type II cards and
microdrives can not be used.
Extreme Pro
Extreme
Extreme IV
Extreme III
Ultra II
SDCFXP 16 GB, 32 GB, 64 GB, 128 GB
SDCFX
SDCFX4
SDCFX3
SDCFH
SDCFB
600 ×
400 ×
300 ×
233 ×
133 ×
80 ×
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB
2 GB, 4 GB
SanDisk
Standard
Professional UDMA
Lexar
Media
Professional
Platinum II
80 ×
60 ×
2 GB, 4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB
4 GB
n
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a Sony H-series QD-H32 XQD card at different
image quality, image size, and image area settings.
❚❚FX (36×24) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Image size
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
15.4 MB
19.4 MB
13.9 MB
17.0 MB
1100
872
92
75
98
76
—
—
—
1500
1200
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
—
—
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
26.5 MB
34.3 MB
1100
872
77
69
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
49.1 MB
28.3 MB
13.2 MB
7.9 MB
5.4 MB
3.0 MB
4.5 MB
2.8 MB
1.6 MB
2.2 MB
1.5 MB
0.9 MB
612
1000
2200
2900
4600
8500
5600
9000
15700
10800
16800
27100
55
59
66
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
170
200
200
182
200
200
200
200
200
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX
crop.
n
444
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❚❚DX (24×16) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Image size
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
—
7.2 MB
8.9 MB
6.6 MB
7.9 MB
2400
1900
3200
2700
200
172
200
196
—
—
—
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
—
—
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
12.0 MB
15.3 MB
2400
1900
133
114
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
21.5 MB
12.6 MB
6.2 MB
3.7 MB
2.8 MB
1.9 MB
2.3 MB
1.6 MB
1.1 MB
1.2 MB
0.9 MB
0.7 MB
1400
2300
4700
5800
8800
13500
11100
16200
24400
20300
28700
40700
61
68
83
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 3
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
JPEG normal 3
JPEG basic 3
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
n
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100.
Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression or auto distortion
control is on.
3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer
capacity drop accordingly.
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 200.
n
446
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with a fully-charged
EN-EL18 battery (2,000 mAh) varies with the condition of the
battery, temperature, and how the camera is used. Sample figures
are given below.
• CIPA standard: Approximately 2600 shots. Measured at 23 °C/
73.4 °F ( 2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings
once every 30 s. Live view not used.
• Nikon standard: Approximately 5500 shots. Measured at 20 °C/68 °F
with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED lens under the following
test conditions: vibration reduction off, image quality set to JPEG
normal, image size set to L (large), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-
release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus
cycled from infinity to minimum range three times; six shots are
then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds
and then turned off; cycle repeated once standby timer has
expired.
n
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Connecting to Ethernet or wireless networks
• Using the optional GP-1 GPS unit
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their
charge if left unused.
• Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery
Calibration, calibrate the battery using the MH-26 battery
charger (if the battery has not been used for more than six
months, recharge the battery when calibration is complete).
n
448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Cropping (PictBridge [Setup] menu) ....
274
D
C
E
n
450
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F
G
H
n
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
ISO sensitivity range (Movie settings) ..
75
M
J
L
n
452
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
No. of copies (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
273
Q
R
O
P
S
Press the shutter-release button
halfway..................................................... 44
Print options (PictBridge [Setup] menu)
273
n
453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
U
V
W
T
n
454
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
X
n
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
a
456
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
AMA14637
Printed in Europe
SB2A01(11)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Do6wMnloBa1d3. 011-01
|
